motor control center replacement-design (phase ii) aecom · motor control center replacement-design...

327

Upload: others

Post on 20-Apr-2020

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship
Page 2: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 Revision 0 IFC Submission

Section # Section Title Rev. # / Issue Date

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000101 Project Title Page 0 11/16 000107 Seals Page 0 11/16 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 0 11/16 011400 Work Restrictions 0 11/16 012500 Substitution Procedures 0 11/16 013100 Project Management and Coordination 0 11/16 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 0 11/16 013300 Submittal Procedures 0 11/16 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 0 11/16 017300 Execution 0 11/16 017310 Cutting and Patching 0 11/16 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 0 11/16 017700 Closeout Procedures 0 11/16 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 0 11/16 017839 Project Record Documents 0 11/16 019113 General Commissioning Requirements 0 11/16 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Demolition 0 11/16 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 033053 Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 0 11/16 DIVISION 05 – METALS 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 0 11/16 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 078413 Penetration Firestopping 0 11/16

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 099600 High-Performance Coatings 0 11/16 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260513 Medium-Voltage Cables 0 11/16 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 0 11/16 260523 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 0 11/16 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 0 11/16 260529 Hangers and Support s for Electrical Systems 0 11/16 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 0 11/16 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 0 11/16

Page 3: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 Revision 0 IFC Submission

Section # Section Title Rev. # / Issue Date

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 0 11/16 260574 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study 0 11/16 260913 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 0 11/16 261116.11 Secondary Unit Substations with Switchgear Secondary 0 11/16 262200 Low-Voltage Transformers 0 11/16 262416 Panelboards 0 11/16 262419 Motor-Control Centers 0 11/16 262813 Fuses 0 11/16 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 0 11/16 262913 Enclosed Controllers 0 11/16 262923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 0 11/16 264313 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 0 11/16 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 4: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 1

SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to indicated areas. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

4. Cafeteria: Only cleared contractor personnel may utilize existing food service facilities.

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

1.3 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Access:

1. The bidders/contractor must coordinate access to site via fax through the Project Manager. This access information must be submitted not less than 7 work days prior to the desired entry date. The access request must contain the following information:

a. Contractors firm name, address & contact number b. Persons' full name, social security number, and date of birth c. Residency Status: Only US citizens shall work on this project. d. Project Manager contact person (name, company & contact number)

2. The USG Project Manager will arrange the access onto site.

Page 5: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 2

B. Contractor Security Plan

1. Scope: The Government has instituted restrictions necessary to maintain the safety and security of its personnel and facilities. These restrictions shall be strictly enforced and no deviation will be tolerated. Violation of this plan shall immediately result in the perpetrator being escorted from the facility, barred from returning and may include the possibility of criminal prosecution.

2. Hours of Operation: No contractor personnel shall be admitted before 0600 hrs nor shall remain on site property after 1700 hrs. Monday through Friday. Exceptions to this rule for operations requiring extra hour weekday work or weekend work will be addressed in writing a minimum of one week in advance. The request MUST include a list of names and social security numbers of all personnel involved. Only U.S. citizens shall be allowed to conduct work at this site.

3. Personnel: The contract must submit a list of all personnel to be admitted to site at least 7 days prior to admission. The list shall contain the full name, social security number and a statement of U.S. citizenship for all personnel. Personnel must all present a picture ID and passport at the gate to gain admission.

4. Equipment: Construction equipment of a personal nature such as truck lock boxes and lockers shall be kept to a minimum. Foremen are requested to consolidate all such equipment into one vehicle per crew to minimize time spent in vehicle inspection. If the use of on-site storage trailers or lockers is necessary, the contractor shall request and coordinate through the USG Project Manager

a. Personal: Personal vehicles of employees will be thoroughly searched by security prior to admission to site. All equipment brought to the site for use and storage will also be searched and verified as needed for construction on site.

b. Heavy Construction Equipment: This equipment shall be thoroughly searched prior to admission to site. Equipment shall only be admitted during hours as specified by the Project Manager and at the gate specified. Since the equipment shall require significant entrance and exit procedures, it is encouraged that the equipment, once admitted, remain on site until such time as no longer required on this job.

5. Vehicles: All vehicles will be thoroughly inspected each time they enter site.

a. Privately Owned Vehicles (POV): POVs will be parked inside the fence line of the site, or as designated by the Project Manager or Security Monitor.

b. Construction vehicles:

1) All Vehicles entering the compound shall be driven by U.S. Citizens. Each truck shall report as required each day and be issued a daily pass. The security personnel shall inspect the truck and verify the person's ID. At the end of the day, all "U" badges will be turned in to the guard upon exiting.

6. Questions: All questions concerning on-site security shall be referred to USG Project Manager.

C. Entry:

Page 6: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 3

1. Upon arrival at site, all uncleared contractor personnel or personnel without a site badge are required to enter via the Remote Delivery Facility (RDF). All persons MUST have valid photo identification. First time entrants must process in person in the RDF Visitor Processing Facility (VPF) lobby area. Personnel information must be completed on the entry forms to apply for access.

2. Security escorts are provided by site and coordinated through the USG Project Manager.

D. Security Escorts

1. The security escorts are for the sole benefit of USG Project Manager. They will be positioned so as to protect site from unauthorized entry, or movement of contractor personnel.

2. The positioning of the escorts will be as deemed necessary by site and will not become the basis for any delay claim.

3. The effect of security escorts to the contractor's planned productivity shall be included in all bid costs.

4. Contractor shall coordinate the number of escorts needed with USG Project Manager at least weekly, and more often if requested by USG Project Manager.

E. Controlled Access of Contractor Personnel

1. Site work: The allowed access area for contractor personnel is shown on the construction drawings as the "Area of Work."

2. Work in Existing Buildings: The construction scope requires demolition and modification to areas in an existing building. These activities must be scheduled and coordinated a minimum of 7 work days in advance through the USG Project Manager. No work will be allowed without appropriately stationed site security escorts.

3. All areas effecting the security and weather tightness of the existing building must be adequately secured and made weatherproof to the satisfaction of the USG Project Manager before the end of the contractor's workday.

1.4 VEHICLE REGISTRATION AND OPERATION

A. Safety Inspection: Privately owned vehicles operating at site are required to display a valid registration, license, and mechanical safety inspection sticker if applicable.

B. Parking: Contractor-owned vehicles and privately owned vehicles will be parked in designated parking area only.

1.5 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Existing building will be occupied during entire construction period. Coordinate and cooperate with Project Manager during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

Page 7: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01140

Page 8: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. All sections included in the Table of Contents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or USG provided form. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

Page 9: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within ten 10 working days of receipt of request, or five (5) working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

Page 10: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 calendar days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

Page 11: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 12: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Request for Information (RFIs) 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Project meetings.

B. Contractor shall have an assigned Superintendent or Foreman who is responsible for managing Contractor personnel, subcontractors, attending meetings, and acts as the point of contact to the Project Manager. This person shall be on site at all times during the construction and shall have no other duties for this Project.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Project Manager or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of personnel assignments, including Superintendent, Foreman and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide

Page 13: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list at project site. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals and requests for information (RFI). 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences.

Page 14: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3

7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

F. Hazardous Materials: Legally dispose of hazardous materials off site.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Project Manager indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

2. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

3. Electrical Work: Show the following:

Page 15: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

4. Review: Project Manager will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Project Manager determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Project Manager will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

5. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version 2008, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.

2. File Submittal Format: Submit coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format and Portable Data File (PDF) format.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specifies.

1. Project Manager will return RFIs submitted to Project Manager by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor’s work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Project Manager. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor’s suggested resolution. If Contractor’s suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

Page 16: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5

12. Contractor’s Signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, product data, shop

drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2. Include the following:

1. Project Name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Project Manager 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn 5. RFI description 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Project Manager’s response was received 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

D. On receipt of Project Manager’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Project Manager within five working days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.8 Reports

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at project site 2. List of separate contractors at project site 3. Approximate count of personnel at project site. 4. Equipment at project site 5. Material deliveries 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. Describe 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses 11. Meter readings and similar recordings 12. Emergency procedures 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction 14. Change Orders received and implemented 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented 16. Services connected and disconnected 17. Equipment or system tests and startups 18. Partial completions and occupancies 19. Substantial Completions authorized

Page 17: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Project Manager of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Contractor shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved.

Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Project Manager, within three working days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Project Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Project Manager but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling.

Page 18: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7

u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Project Manager of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility requirements. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written instructions. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Installation procedures. u. Coordination with other work. v. Required performance results. w. Protection of adjacent work. x. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

Page 19: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Project Manager, prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Contractor shall record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Project Manager, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

Page 20: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Hazards and risks. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 20) Escort requirements.

4. Minutes: Contractor shall record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 013100

Page 21: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 22: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Project Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Project Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by reviewer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

Page 23: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Project Manager's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of Contract Drawings will not be provided by Project Manager for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Project Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Project Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Project Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

Page 24: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Project Manager’s consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Submittal received on Friday afternoon will not be processed until following Monday, which will be recorded receipt of submittal date.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Project Manager.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Project Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Project Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Project Manager.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Project Manager will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information:

Page 25: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4

1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 6) Category and type of submittal. 7) Submittal purpose and description. 8) Specification Section number and title. 9) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items. 10) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 11) Indication of full or partial submittal. 12) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 13) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 14) Remarks. 15) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Project Manager or his reviewer.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. d. Category and type of submittal. e. Submittal purpose and description. f. Specification Section number and title. g. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. i. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. j. Related physical samples submitted directly. k. Indication of full or partial submittal. l. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. m. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. n. Other necessary identification.

Page 26: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5

o. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Project Manager.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Project Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Project Manager will accept not more than 1 resubmittal. 4. Resubmit submittals until they are stamped with action by Project Manager or his

reviewer allowing Work to proceed.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Project Manager's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform no portion of Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals until respective submittal has been returned stamped with action by Project Manager or his reviewer allowing Work to proceed.

B. Direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by Project Manager or his reviewer on previous submittals.

2.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Project Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

Page 27: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6

2. Action Submittals: Submit six (6) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.

3. Informational Submittals: Submit three (3) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Project Manager or his reviewer will not return copies.

4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. i. Manufacturer's written recommendations. j. Manufacturer's installation instructions. k. Mill reports. l. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. m. Approval number of organizations or agencies as required by agencies having

jurisdiction. n. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurements. o. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data

Page 28: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. h. Dimensions. i. Fabrication and installation drawings. j. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. k. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

l. Templates and patterns. m. Design calculations.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Submit six (6) blue- or black-line prints for each submittal, unless prints are

required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five (5) prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Reviewer will retain three (3) prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record, in addition to physical sample.

Page 29: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Page 30: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Page 31: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

W. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

X. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Y. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

Z. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner

2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate,

Page 32: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11

signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Project Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 PROJECT MANAGER'S ACTION

A. Project Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return submittals without action.

B. Action Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Project Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. “A” APPROVED - No corrections required; no exceptions taken; and the work/fabrication can proceed.

2. “B” APPROVED AS NOTED - Minor reviewer comments or information provided; no requirement to see a response from Contractor; work/fabrication may proceed on the basis of corrections indicated.

3. “C” CORRECT AND RESUBMIT - Minor to major reviewer comments, corrections or information provided; proper understanding of the Contractor’s intentions and demonstration of compliance with the Contract Documents required; work/fabrication cannot proceed.

4. “D” DISAPPROVED - Review indicates that represented work is not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or the number of reviewer comments raises doubts as to the Contractor’s intentions and/or understanding of the work. Reasons for disapproval must be in accordance with the Contract Documents and must be clearly and explicitly defined.

Page 33: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 12

5. “E” FOR INFORMATION ONLY - No approval required - submittal required for informational purposes only; submittal will be held awaiting future, related submittals; or similar appropriate reason for taking no action.

C. Informational Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Project Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Project Manager.

E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Project Manager or his reviewer without action.

END OF SECTION 013300

Page 34: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

Page 35: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. 2. Two (2) paper copies.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

Page 36: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed

until most recent Application for Payment.

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including

commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

Page 37: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Construction Manager's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 10 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner.

Page 38: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Fabrication. e. Deliveries. f. Installation. g. Tests and inspections. h. Adjusting. i. Curing. j. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

Page 39: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 15 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

1. Use operating system.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery.

Page 40: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7

e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 12 percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect.

b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

Page 41: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 8

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.

2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.

3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.

4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings.

a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom.

b. Submit value summary printouts one (1) week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected.

Page 42: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 9

17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one (1) day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one (1) week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

Page 43: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 10

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Project Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION 013200

Page 44: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Project Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Project Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by reviewer and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

Page 45: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Project Manager's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of Contract Drawings will not be provided by Project Manager for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Project Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Project Manager's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Project Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

Page 46: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Project Manager’s consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Submittal received on Friday afternoon will not be processed until following Monday, which will be recorded receipt of submittal date.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Project Manager.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Project Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Project Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Project Manager.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Project Manager will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information:

Page 47: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4

1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 6) Category and type of submittal. 7) Submittal purpose and description. 8) Specification Section number and title. 9) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items. 10) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 11) Indication of full or partial submittal. 12) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 13) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 14) Remarks. 15) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Project Manager or his reviewer.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. d. Category and type of submittal. e. Submittal purpose and description. f. Specification Section number and title. g. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. h. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. i. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. j. Related physical samples submitted directly. k. Indication of full or partial submittal. l. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. m. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. n. Other necessary identification.

Page 48: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5

o. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Project Manager.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Project Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Project Manager will accept not more than 1 resubmittal. 4. Resubmit submittals until they are stamped with action by Project Manager or his

reviewer allowing Work to proceed.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Project Manager's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform no portion of Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals until respective submittal has been returned stamped with action by Project Manager or his reviewer allowing Work to proceed.

B. Direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by Project Manager or his reviewer on previous submittals.

2.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Project Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

Page 49: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6

2. Action Submittals: Submit six (6) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.

3. Informational Submittals: Submit three (3) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Project Manager or his reviewer will not return copies.

4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. i. Manufacturer's written recommendations. j. Manufacturer's installation instructions. k. Mill reports. l. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. m. Approval number of organizations or agencies as required by agencies having

jurisdiction. n. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurements. o. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data

Page 50: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. h. Dimensions. i. Fabrication and installation drawings. j. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. k. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

l. Templates and patterns. m. Design calculations.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Submit six (6) blue- or black-line prints for each submittal, unless prints are

required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five (5) prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Reviewer will retain three (3) prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record, in addition to physical sample.

Page 51: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Page 52: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Page 53: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

W. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

X. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Y. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

Z. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner

2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate,

Page 54: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11

signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Project Manager.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 PROJECT MANAGER'S ACTION

A. Project Manager will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return submittals without action.

B. Action Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Project Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. “A” APPROVED - No corrections required; no exceptions taken; and the work/fabrication can proceed.

2. “B” APPROVED AS NOTED - Minor reviewer comments or information provided; no requirement to see a response from Contractor; work/fabrication may proceed on the basis of corrections indicated.

3. “C” CORRECT AND RESUBMIT - Minor to major reviewer comments, corrections or information provided; proper understanding of the Contractor’s intentions and demonstration of compliance with the Contract Documents required; work/fabrication cannot proceed.

4. “D” DISAPPROVED - Review indicates that represented work is not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or the number of reviewer comments raises doubts as to the Contractor’s intentions and/or understanding of the work. Reasons for disapproval must be in accordance with the Contract Documents and must be clearly and explicitly defined.

Page 55: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 12

5. “E” FOR INFORMATION ONLY - No approval required - submittal required for informational purposes only; submittal will be held awaiting future, related submittals; or similar appropriate reason for taking no action.

C. Informational Submittals: Project Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Project Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Project Manager.

E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Project Manager or his reviewer without action.

END OF SECTION 013300

Page 56: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, other construction forces employed by Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electric Power Service: Electric power from existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. Contractor shall provide a GFI pigtail, or similar device between the site power source and any power tools Contractor is using. NO EXCEPTIONS

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

1. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 2. Waste handling procedures. 3. Other dust-control measures. 4. Minimum acceptable construction of dust-control partitions consists of 2 by 4 wood studs

at 16 inches on center with two layers of 10-mil polyethylene on each side, securely taped at seams, tops, bottoms, and sides. Promptly repair any damage.

B. Site Safety Plan: Describe procedures for protection of life and property during the Work. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for Safety Management of this Project. Provide OSHA-approved safety devices when required; follow applicable practices as identified in OSHA, 29 CFR 1926.

Page 57: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2

C. Permits: For the following in accordance with the Site Safety Plan:

1. Hot Work Permit 2. Confined Spaces Permit 3. Life Safety Permit

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil thickness, with flame-spread rating of 10 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2

C. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

Page 58: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated; Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.

B. Heating Equipment: Unless Project Manager authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to Project Manager, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.

C. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.

D. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.

2.4 SITE SAFETY PLAN

A. Contractor’s Site Safety Plan shall include the following, as a minimum.

1. Provision of Training Certifications and Licenses for employees. 2. Knowledge and Understanding of Site Safety Requirements for conducting the following

processes and procedures:

a. Lock-Out/Tag-Out b. Energized Electrical Hot Work (permit required) c. Confined Spaces (permit required) d. Life Safety (permit required) e. Emergency procedures f. Fall protection g. Housekeeping h. Recycling i. Fire Prevention j. Smoking Regulations k. Hazmat/Haz-waste disposal l. Hazard Communications/Right to Know m. Material handling equipment operation n. Personal Protective Equipment requirements.

Page 59: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

C. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until Project Manager schedules Substantial Completion

inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,

Page 60: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5

restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

Page 61: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasket dustproof doors and security locks

where openings are required. 6. Protect air-handling equipment. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Project Manager.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

Page 62: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 015000

Page 63: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 64: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

4. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

Page 65: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

2. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Project Manager for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

Page 66: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 3

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Project Manager according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the building layout and location. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Project Manager promptly.

B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

Page 67: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 4

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Project Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Project Manager.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and

90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Project Manager.

Page 68: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 5

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

Page 69: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

EXECUTION 017300 - 6

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION 017300

Page 70: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 1

SECTION 017310 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

D. Requirements in this Section apply to electrical installations. See Divisions 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List

utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

Page 71: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 2

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch elements or related components in a manner that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Project Manager’s opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Page 72: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

Page 73: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017310 - 4

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

END OF SECTION 01731

Page 74: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements and for disposition of hazardous waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Equipment. b. Electrical conduit.

Page 75: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2

c. Copper wiring. d. Lighting fixtures. e. Electrical devices. f. Switchgear and panelboards. g. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Masonry and CMU. b. Metals. c. Electrical conduit.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

END OF SECTION 017419

Page 76: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

Page 77: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Project Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Project Manager's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

Page 78: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Project Manager will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Project Manager, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

a. Project Manager will make 1 repeat inspection.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Project Manager’s Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Project Manager. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Project Manager will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

Page 79: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Project Manager. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Project Manager, will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Project Manager, will return annotated file. c. Three paper copies. Project Manager will return two copies

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Project Manager for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

Page 80: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

Page 81: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

END OF SECTION 017700

Page 82: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Project Manager will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

Page 83: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Project Manager will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Project Manager will return copy with comments.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In preparation of operation and maintenance data, use personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved.

1. Where manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing where necessary for communication of essential data.

a. Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, use draftspersons capable of preparing drawings clearly in understandable format.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

Page 84: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

Page 85: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

a. Provide specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate relationship of component parts of equipment or systems or to provide control or flow diagrams. Coordinate specially prepared drawings with information contained in project record drawings specified in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

1) Do not use original record documents as part of operation maintenance manuals.

3. Specifications: Component or system specification section copied and inserted complete with modifications.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf] binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components

Page 86: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

c. Provide specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate relationship of component parts of equipment or systems or to provide control or flow diagrams. Coordinate specially prepared drawings with information contained in project record drawings specified in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" to assure correct illustration of completed installation.

1) Do not use original record documents as part of operation maintenance manuals.

6. Specifications: Component or system specification section copied and inserted complete with modifications.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

Page 87: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6

4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

F. Condensed Operating Instructions: Condensed instructions for start-up, shut-down, emergency operation, safety precautions, unusual features, and troubleshooting instructions.

1. In addition to copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual, permanently secure laminated copy adjacent to equipment where copy can be easily read by operating personnel.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition.

Page 88: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

a. If system's control drawing is not adequate, provide simplified, professionally drawn, single line diagrams on minimum 8-1/2 by 11 inch (215 by 280 mm) (A4 size), 20 pound (75 g) white bond paper.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

Page 89: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8

2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. 7. List of special tools required to service or maintain equipment.

E. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: Condensed typewritten excerpts from manufacturer's written instructions for weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual, and other regularly scheduled maintenance prepared by mechanical subcontractor with assistance from equipment supplier.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Control Drawings: Include control drawings for equipment and components, including sequence of operation. Control drawings shall be prepared by controls contractor and included here and in control contractor's Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal.

H. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

I. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

J. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

Page 90: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 9

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION 017823

Page 91: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 92: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit two (2) sets of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one (1) paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one (1) paper copy of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

Page 93: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Project Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG, Version 2008 operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

Page 94: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3

5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Project Manager for resolution.

a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of digital data files.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Project Manager determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Project Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Project Manager. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

Page 95: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Project Manager's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION 017839

Page 96: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1

SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Owner's Project Requirements and Basis-of-Design documentation are included by reference for information only.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. General requirements for coordinating and scheduling commissioning. 2. Commissioning meetings. 3. Commissioning reports. 4. Use of test equipment, instrumentation, and tools for commissioning. 5. Construction checklists, including, but not limited to, installation checks, startup,

performance tests, and performance test demonstration. 6. Commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstration. 7. Adjusting, verifying, and documenting identified systems and assemblies.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submittal procedures requirements for commissioning.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion submittal requirements.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for preliminary operation and maintenance data submittal.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Labor and management costs for the performance of commissioning.

B. The following are excluded from the commissioning allowance:

1. Equipment and systems installation, startup, and field quality-control testing indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Test equipment, instrumentation, and tools (including, but not limited to, proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools) required to perform tests.

3. Work to correct commissioning issues.

Page 97: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 2

4. Work to repeat tests when equipment and systems fail acceptance criteria.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance Criteria: Threshold of acceptable work quality or performance specified for a commissioning activity, including, but not limited to, construction checklists, performance tests, performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests and commissioning test demonstrations.

B. Basis-of-Design Document: A document prepared by Owner, Architect, or Commissioning Authority that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to comply with Owner's Project Requirements and to suit applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines.

C. Commissioning Authority: An entity engaged by Owner, and identified in Section 011000 "Summary," to evaluate Commissioning-Process Work.

D. Commissioning Plan: A document, prepared by Commissioning Authority, that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of commissioning.

E. Commissioning: A quality-focused process for verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and assemblies are planned, designed, installed, and tested to comply with Owner's Project Requirements. The requirements specified here are limited to the construction phase commissioning activities.

F. Construction Phase Commissioning Completion: The stage of completion and acceptance of commissioning when resolution of deficient conditions and issues discovered during commissioning and retesting until acceptable results are obtained has been accomplished. Owner will establish in writing the date Construction Phase Commissioning Completion is achieved. See Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion submittal requirements.

1. Commissioning is complete when the work specified in this Section and related Sections has been completed and accepted, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Completion of tests and acceptance of test results. b. Resolution of issues, as verified by retests performed and documented with

acceptance of retest results. c. Completion and acceptance of submittals and reports.

G. Owner's Project Requirements: A document written by Owner, Architect, or Commissioning Authority that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated, including Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.

H. Owner's Witness: Commissioning Authority, Owner's Project Manager, or Architect-designated witness authorized to authenticate test demonstration data and to sign completed test data forms.

Page 98: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 3

I. "Systems," "Assemblies," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components.

J. Test: Performance tests, performance test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations.

K. Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by Attributes: As defined in ASQ Z1.4.

1.5 COMPENSATION

A. Should Architect, Commissioning Authority, other Owner's witness, or Owner's staff perform additional services or incur additional expenses due to actions of Contractor listed below, compensate Owner for such additional services and expenses.

1. Failure to provide timely notice of commissioning activities schedule changes. 2. Failure to meet acceptance criteria for test demonstrations.

1.6 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s):

1. Commissioning Coordinator: A person or entity employed by Contractor to manage, schedule, and coordinate commissioning.

2. Project superintendent and other employees that Contractor may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

3. Subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists that Contractor may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

4. Appointed team members shall have the authority to act on behalf of the entity they represent.

B. Members Appointed by Owner:

1. Commissioning authority, plus consultants that Commissioning Authority may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

2. Owner representative(s), facility operations and maintenance personnel, plus other employees, separate contractors, and consultants that Owner may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

3. Architect, plus employees and consultants that Architect may deem appropriate for a particular portion of the commissioning.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submittal procedures general requirements for commissioning.

B. Commissioning Plan Information:

Page 99: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 4

1. List of Contractor-appointed commissioning team members to include specific personnel and subcontractors to the performance of the various commissioning requirements.

2. Schedule of commissioning activities, integrated with the construction schedule. Comply with requirements in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedule general requirements for commissioning.

3. Contractor personnel and subcontractors to participate in each test. 4. List of instrumentation required for each test to include identification of parties that will

provide instrumentation for each test.

C. Commissioning schedule.

D. Two-week look-ahead schedules.

E. List test instrumentation, equipment, and monitoring devices. Include the following information:

1. Make, model, serial number, and application for each instrument, equipment, and monitoring device.

2. Brief description of intended use. 3. Calibration record showing the following:

a. Calibration agency, including name and contact information. b. Last date of calibration. c. Range of values for which calibration is valid. d. Certification of accuracy. e. N.I.S.T. traceability certification for calibration equipment. f. Due date of the next calibration.

F. Test Reports:

1. Pre-Startup Report: Prior to start up of equipment or a system, submit signed, completed construction checklists.

2. Test Data Reports: At the end of each day in which tests are conducted, submit test data for tests performed.

3. Commissioning Issues Reports: Daily, at the end of each day in which tests are conducted, submit commissioning issue reports for tests for which acceptable results were not achieved.

4. Weekly Progress Report: Weekly, at the end of each week in which tests are conducted, submit a progress report.

5. Data Trend Logs: Submit data trend logs at the end of the trend log period. 6. System Alarm Logs: Daily, at the start of days following a day in which tests were

performed, submit print-out of log of alarms that occurred since the last log was printed.

G. Construction Checklists:

1. Material checks. 2. Installation checks. 3. Startup procedures, where required.

Page 100: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 5

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Commissioning Report:

1. At Construction Phase Commissioning Completion, include the following:

a. Pre-startup reports. b. Approved test procedures. c. Test data forms, completed and signed. d. Progress reports. e. Commissioning issues report log. f. Commissioning issues reports showing resolution of issues. g. Correspondence or other documents related to resolution of issues. h. Other reports required by commissioning. i. List unresolved issues and reasons they remain unresolved and should be exempted

from the requirements for Construction Phase Commissioning Completion. j. Report shall include commissioning work of Contractor.

B. Request for Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For proprietary test equipment, instrumentation, and tools to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Commissioning Coordinator Qualifications:

1. Documented experience commissioning systems of similar complexity to those contained in these documents on at least three projects of similar scope and complexity.

2. Certification of commissioning process expertise. The following certifications are acceptable. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject certifications as evidence of qualification.

a. Certified Commissioning Professional, by Building Commissioning Association.

B. Calibration Agency Qualifications: Certified by The American Association of Laboratory Accreditation that the calibration agency complies with minimum requirements of ISO/IEC 17025.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTATION, AND TOOLS

A. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform the commissioning shall remain the property of Contractor unless otherwise indicated.

Page 101: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 6

B. Test equipment and instrumentation required to perform commissioning shall comply with the following criteria:

1. Be manufactured for the purpose of testing and measuring tests for which they are being used and have an accuracy to test and measure system performance within the tolerances required to determine acceptable performance.

2. Calibrated and certified. 3. Maintain test equipment and instrumentation. 4. Use test equipment and instrumentation only for testing or monitoring Work for which

they are designed.

2.2 REPORT FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION

A. General Format and Organization:

1. Bind report in three-ring binders. 2. Label the front cover and spine of each binder with the report title, volume number,

project name, Contractor's name, and date of report. 3. Record report on compact disk. 4. Electronic Data: Portable document format (PDF); a single file with outline-organized

bookmarks for major and minor tabs and tab contents itemized for specific reports.

B. Commissioning Report:

1. Include a table of contents and an index to each test. 2. Include major tabs for each Specification Section. 3. Include minor tabs for each test. 4. Within each minor tab, include the following:

a. Test specification. b. Pre-startup reports. c. Approved test procedures. d. Test data forms, completed and signed. e. Commissioning issue reports, showing resolution of issues, and documentation

related to resolution of issues pertaining to a single test. Group data forms, commissioning issue reports showing resolution of issues, and documentation related to resolution of issues for each test repetition together within the minor tab, in reverse chronological order (most recent on top).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Review preliminary construction checklists and preliminary test procedures and data forms.

Page 102: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 7

3.2 CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS

A. Construction checklists cannot modify or conflict with the Contract Documents.

B. Create construction checklists based on actual systems and equipment to be included in Project.

C. Material Checks: Compare specified characteristics and approved submittals with materials as received. Include factory tests and other evaluations, adjustments, and tests performed prior to shipment, if applicable.

1. Services connection requirements, including configuration, size, location, and other pertinent characteristics.

2. Included optional features. 3. Delivery Receipt Check: Inspect and record physical condition of materials and

equipment on delivery to Project site, including agreement with approved submittals, cleanliness and lack of damage.

4. Installation Checks:

a. Location according to Drawings and approved Shop Drawings. b. Configuration. c. Compliance with manufacturers' written installation instructions. d. Attachment to structure. e. Access clearance to allow for maintenance, service, repair, removal, and

replacement without the need to disassemble or remove other equipment or building elements. Access coordinated with other building elements and equipment, including, but not limited to, ceiling and wall access panels, in a manner consistent with OSHA fall-protection regulations and safe work practices.

f. Utility connections are of the correct characteristics, as applicable. g. Correct labeling and identification. h. Startup Checks: Verify readiness of equipment to be energized. Include

manufacturer's standard startup procedures and forms.

D. Startup: Perform and document initial operation of equipment to prove that it is installed properly and operates as intended according to manufacturer's standard startup procedures, minimum.

E. Performance Tests:

1. Static Tests: As specified elsewhere, including, but not limited to, duct and pipe leakage tests, insulation-resistance tests, and water-penetration tests.

2. Component Performance Tests: Tests evaluate the performance of an input or output of components under a full range of operating conditions.

3. Equipment and Assembly Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of equipment and assemblies under a full range of operating conditions and loads.

4. System Performance Tests: Test and evaluate performance of systems under a full range of operating conditions and loads.

5. Intersystem Performance Tests: Test and evaluate the interface of different systems under a full range of operating conditions and loads.

Page 103: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 8

3.3 GENERAL EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule and coordinate commissioning with the construction schedule.

B. Perform activities identified in construction checklists, including tests, and document results of actions as construction proceeds.

C. Perform test demonstrations for Owner's witness. Unless otherwise indicated, demonstrate tests for 100 percent of work to which the test applies.

3.4 COMMISSIONING TESTING

A. Quality Control: Construction checklists, including tests, are quality-control tools designed to improve the functional quality of Project. Test demonstrations evaluate the effectiveness of Contractor's quality-control process.

B. Owner's witness will be present to witness commissioning work requiring the signature of an owner's witness, including, but not limited to, test demonstrations. Owner's project manager will coordinate attendance by Owner's witness with Contractor's published commissioning schedule. Owner's witness will provide no labor or materials in the commissioning work. The only function of Owner's witness will be to observe and comment on the progress and results of commissioning.

C. Construction Checklists:

1. Complete construction checklists as Work is completed. 2. Distribute construction checklists to installing contractors before they start work. 3. Installers:

a. Verify installation using approved construction checklists as Work proceeds. b. Complete and sign construction weekly for work performed during the preceding

week.

4. Provide Commissioning Authority access to construction checklists.

D. Installation Compliance Issues: Record as an installation compliance issue Work found to be incomplete, inaccessible, at variance with the Contract Documents, nonfunctional, or that does not comply with construction checklists. Record installation compliance issues on the construction checklist at the time they are identified. Record corrective action and how future Work should be modified before signing off the construction checklist.

E. Pre-Startup Audit: Prior to executing startup procedures, review completed installation checks to determine readiness for startup and operation. Report conditions, which, if left uncorrected, adversely impact the ability of systems or equipment to operate satisfactorily or to comply with acceptance criteria. Prepare pre-startup report for each system.

F. Test Procedures and Test Data Forms:

Page 104: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 9

1. Test procedures shall define the step-by-step procedures to be used to execute tests and test demonstrations.

2. Test procedures shall be specific to the make, model, and application of the equipment and systems being tested.

3. Completed test data forms are the official records of the results of tests. 4. Commissioning Authority will provide to Contractor preliminary test procedures and test

data forms for performance tests and commissioning tests after approval of Product Data, Shop Drawings, and preliminary operation and maintenance manual.

5. Review preliminary test procedures and test data forms and provide comments within 14 days of receipt from Commissioning Authority. Review shall address the following:

a. Equipment protection and warranty issues, including, but not limited to, manufacturers' installation and startup recommendations, and operation and maintenance instructions.

b. Applicability of the procedure to the specific software, equipment, and systems approved for installation.

6. After Contractor has reviewed and commented on the preliminary test procedures and test data forms, Commissioning Authority will revise and reissue the approved revised test procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing."

7. Use only approved test procedures and test data forms marked "Approved for Testing" to perform and document tests and test demonstrations.

G. Performance of Tests:

1. The sampling rate for tests is 100 percent. The sampling rate for test demonstrations is 100 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2. Perform and complete each step of the approved test procedures in the order listed. 3. Record data observed during performance of tests on approved data forms at the time of

test performance and when the results are observed. 4. Record test results that are not within the range of acceptable results on commissioning

issue report forms in addition to recording the results on approved test procedures and data forms according to the "Commissioning Compliance Issues" Paragraph in this Article.

5. On completion of a test, sign the completed test procedure and data form. Tests for which test procedures and data forms are incomplete, not signed, or which indicate performance that does not comply with acceptance criteria will be rejected. Tests for which test procedures and data forms are rejected shall be repeated and results resubmitted.

6. Test demonstration data forms not signed by Contractor and Owner's witness at the time of the completion of the procedure will be rejected. Test demonstrations for which data forms are rejected shall be repeated and results shall be resubmitted.

a. Exception for Failure of Owner's Witness to Attend: Failure of Owner's witness to be present for agreed-on schedule of test demonstration shall not delay Contractor. If Owner's witness fails to attend a scheduled test, Contractor shall proceed with the scheduled test. On completion, Contractor shall sign the data form for Contractor and for Owner's witness, and shall note the absence of Owner's witness at the scheduled time and place.

7. False load test requirements are specified in related sections.

Page 105: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 10

a. Where false load testing is specified, provide temporary equipment, power, controls, wiring, piping, valves, and other necessary equipment and connections required to apply the specified load to the system. False load system shall be capable of steady-state operation and modulation at the level of load specified. Equipment and systems permanently installed in this work shall not be used to create the false load without Architect's written approval.

H. Commissioning Compliance Issues:

1. Test results that are not within the range of acceptable results are commissioning compliance issues.

2. Track and report commissioning compliance issues until resolution and retesting are successfully completed.

3. If a test demonstration fails, determine the cause of failure. Direct timely resolution of issue and then repeat the demonstration. If a test demonstration must be repeated due to failure caused by Contractor work or materials, reimburse Owner for billed costs for the participation in the repeated demonstration.

4. Test Results: If a test demonstration fails to meet the acceptance criteria, perform the following:

a. Complete a commissioning compliance issue report form promptly on discovery of test results that do not comply with acceptance criteria.

b. Submit commissioning compliance issue report form within 24 hours of the test. c. Determine the cause of the failure. d. Establish responsibility for corrective action if the failure is due to conditions

found to be Contractor's responsibility.

5. Commissioning Compliance Issue Report: Provide a commissioning compliance issue report for each issue. Do not report multiple issues on the same commissioning compliance issue report.

a. Exception: If an entire class of devices is determined to exhibit the identical issue, they may be reported on a single commissioning compliance issue report. (For example, if all return-air damper actuators that are specified to fail to the open position are found to fail to the closed position, they may be reported on a single commissioning issue report. If a single commissioning issue report is used for multiple commissioning compliance issues, each device shall be identified in the report, and the total number of devices at issue shall be identified.

b. Complete and submit Part 1 of the commissioning compliance issue report immediately when the condition is observed.

c. Record the commissioning compliance issue report number and describe the deficient condition on the data form.

d. Resolve commissioning compliance issues promptly. Complete and submit Part 2 of the commissioning compliance issue report when issues are resolved.

6. Diagnose and correct failed test demonstrations as follows:

a. Perform diagnostic tests and activities required to determine the fundamental cause of issues observed.

Page 106: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 11

b. Record each step of the diagnostic procedure prior to performing the procedure. Update written procedure as changes become necessary.

c. Record the results of each step of the diagnostic procedure. d. Record the conclusion of the diagnostic procedure on the fundamental cause of the

issue. e. Determine and record corrective measures. f. Include diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues in commissioning compliance

issue report.

7. Retest:

a. Schedule and repeat the complete test procedure for each test demonstration for which acceptable results are not achieved. Obtain signature of Owner's witness on retest data forms. Repeat test demonstration until acceptable results are achieved. Except for issues that are determined to result from design errors or omissions, or other conditions beyond Contractor's responsibility, compensate Owner for direct costs incurred as the result of repeated test demonstrations to achieve acceptable results.

b. For each repeated test demonstration, submit a new test data form, marked "Retest."

3.5 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

A. Schedule and conduct commissioning meetings. Comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.6 SEQUENCING

A. Sequencing of Commissioning Verification Activities: For a particular material, item of equipment, assembly, or system, perform the following in the order listed unless otherwise indicated:

1. Construction Checklists:

a. Material checks. b. Installation checks. c. Start up, as appropriate. Some startup may depend on component performance.

Such startup may follow component performance tests on which the startup depends.

d. Performance Tests:

1) Static tests, as appropriate. 2) Component performance tests. Some component performance tests may

depend on completion of startup. Such component performance tests may follow startup.

3) Equipment and assembly performance tests. 4) System performance tests. 5) Intersystem performance tests.

Page 107: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 12

2. Commissioning tests.

B. Before performing commissioning tests, verify that materials, equipment, assemblies, and systems are delivered, installed, started, and adjusted to perform according to construction checklists.

C. Verify readiness of materials, equipment, assemblies, and systems by performing tests prior to performing test demonstrations. Notify Architect if acceptable results cannot be achieved due to conditions beyond Contractor's control or responsibility.

D. Commence tests as soon as installation checks for materials, equipment, assemblies, or systems are satisfactorily completed. Tests of a particular system may proceed prior to completion of other systems, provided the incomplete work does not interfere with successful execution of test.

3.7 SCHEDULING

A. Commence commissioning as early in the construction period as possible.

B. Commissioning Schedule: Integrate commissioning into Contractor's construction schedule. See Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

1. Include detailed commissioning activities in monthly updated Contractor's construction schedule and short interval schedule submittals.

2. Schedule the start date and duration for the following commissioning activities:

a. Submittals. b. Preliminary operation and maintenance manual submittals. c. Installation checks. d. Startup, where required. e. Performance tests. f. Performance test demonstrations. g. Commissioning tests. h. Commissioning test demonstrations.

3. Schedule shall include a line item for each installation check, startup, and test activity specific to the equipment or systems involved.

4. Determine milestones and prerequisites for commissioning. Show commissioning milestones, prerequisites, and dependencies in monthly updated critical-path-method construction schedule and short interval schedule submittals.

C. Two-Week Look-Ahead Commissioning Schedule:

1. Two weeks prior to the beginning of tests, submit a detailed two-week look-ahead schedule. Thereafter, submit updated two-week look-ahead schedules weekly for the duration of commissioning.

2. Two-week look-ahead schedules shall identify the date, time, beginning location, Contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each startup or test activity.

Page 108: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 13

3. Use two-week look-ahead schedules to notify and coordinate participation of Owner's witnesses.

D. Owner's Witness Coordination:

1. Coordinate Owner's witness participation via Architect. 2. Notify Architect of commissioning schedule changes at least five (5) work days in

advance for activities requiring the participation of Owner's witness.

3.8 COMMISSIONING REPORTS

A. Test Reports:

1. Pre-startup reports include observations of the conditions of installation, organized into the following sections:

a. Equipment Model Verification: Compare contract requirements, approved submittals, and provided equipment. Note inconsistencies.

b. Preinstallation Physical Condition Checks: Observe physical condition of equipment prior to installation. Note conditions including, but not limited to, physical damage, corrosion, water damage, or other contamination or dirt.

c. Preinstallation Component Verification Checks: Verify components supplied with the equipment, preinstalled or field installed, are correctly installed and functional. Verify external components required for proper operation of equipment correctly installed and functional. Note missing, improperly configured, improperly installed, or nonfunctional components.

d. Summary of Installation Compliance Issues and Corrective Actions: Identify installation compliance issues and the corrective actions for each. Verify that issues noted have been corrected.

e. Evaluation of System Readiness for Startup: For each item of equipment for each system for which startup is anticipated, document in summary form acceptable to Owner completion of equipment model verification, preinstallation physical condition checks, preinstallation component verification checks, and completion of corrective actions for installation compliance issues.

2. Test data reports include the following:

a. "As-tested" system configuration. Complete record of conditions under which the test was performed, including, but not limited to, the status of equipment, systems, and assemblies; temporary adjustments and settings; and ambient conditions.

b. Data and observations, including, but not limited to, data trend logs, recorded during the tests.

c. Signatures of individuals performing and witnessing tests. d. Data trend logs accumulated overnight from the previous day of testing.

3. Commissioning Compliance Issues Reports: Report as commissioning compliance issues results of tests and test demonstrations that do not comply with acceptance criteria. Report only one issue per commissioning compliance issue report. Use sequentially numbered facsimiles of commissioning compliance issue report form included in this

Page 109: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 14

Section, or other form approved by Owner. Distribute commissioning compliance issue reports to parties responsible for taking corrective action. Identify the following:

a. Commissioning compliance issue report number. Assign unique, sequential numbers to individual commissioning compliance issue reports when they are created, to be used for tracking.

b. Action distribution list. c. Report date. d. Test number and description. e. Equipment identification and location. f. Briefly describe observations about the performance associated with failure to

achieve acceptable results. Identify the cause of failure if apparent. g. Diagnostic procedure or plan to determine the cause (include in initial submittal). h. Diagnosis of fundamental cause of issues as specified below (include in

resubmittal). i. Fundamental cause of unacceptable performance as determined by diagnostic tests

and activities. j. When issues have been resolved, update and resubmit the commissioning issue

report forms by completing Part 2. Identify resolution taken and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.

k. Schedule for retesting.

4. Weekly progress reports include information for tests conducted since the preceding report and the following:

a. Completed data forms. b. Equipment or system tested, including test number, system or equipment tag

number and location, and notation about the apparent acceptability of results. c. Activities scheduled but not conducted per schedule. d. Commissioning compliance issue report log. e. Schedule changes for remaining Commissioning-Process Work, if any.

5. Data trend logs shall be initiated and running prior to the time scheduled for the test demonstration.

a. Trend log data format shall be multiple data series graphs. Where multiple data series are trend logged concurrently, present the data on a common horizontal time axis. Individual data series may be presented on a segmented vertical axis to avoid interference of one data series with another, and to accommodate different axis scale values. Graphs shall be sufficiently clear to interpret data within the accuracy required by the acceptance criteria.

b. Attach to the data form printed trend log data collected during the test or test demonstration.

c. Record, print out, and attach to the data form operator activity during the time the trend log is running. During the time the trend log is running, operator intervention not directed by the test procedure invalidates the test results.

END OF SECTION 019113

Page 110: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in place site utilities. 2. Holes for penetrations through existing floors and walls.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver them to Project Manager

C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

Page 111: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2

C. Proposed Environmental-Protection, Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: After building demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Areas to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of Work.

B. Owner will occupy areas immediately adjacent to demolition area. Conduct building demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

1. Provide not less than 17 days notice to Project Manager of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities

a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for items to be demolished.

Page 112: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

2. Before building demolition, Project Manager will remove items as indicated on Drawings.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Project Manager. Hazardous materials will be removed under a separate contract.

F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

Page 113: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of building demolition required.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Project Manager and Architect. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to Project Manager.

E. If removing any building structural systems, perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

F. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Project Manager will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding

with building demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 610 mm (24 inches) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

Page 114: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5

1. Project Manager will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding

with building demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 610 mm (24 inches) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:

1. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Project Manager. 4. Transport items to Project Manager’s storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations.

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by Project Manager, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete.

C. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Project Manager.

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Project Manager.

a. Provide at least 17 days notice to Project Manager if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

D. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

1. Protect existing adjacent building items to remain. 2. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people

and damage to adjacent items to remain. 3. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of buildings and structures. 4. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain

and that are exposed to building demolition operations.

Page 115: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6

5. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise from occupied portions of adjacent buildings.

3.5 DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish indicated existing items completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain

fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Locate demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Project Manager. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Project Manager.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.

3.6 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Remove buildings and structures and site improvements intact when permitted by Project Manager.

B. Concrete: Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Cut masonry at junctures with construction indicated to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished at junctures with construction indicated to remain, then break up and remove.

E. Equipment: Disconnect equipment at nearest fitting connection to services, complete with service valves. Remove as whole units, complete with controls.

3.7 EXPLOSIVE DEMOLITION

A. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

Page 116: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 7

3.8 REPAIRS

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition operations.

B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.

C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.]

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 2. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

D. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119

Page 117: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 118: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 1

SECTION 033053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements.

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Floor and slab treatments. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Vapor retarders

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

Page 119: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing." 6. "Lightweight Concrete."

B. Comply with ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, as drawn.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag

or Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-1/2-inch (38-mmnominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

Page 120: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 3

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

G. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A or B.

B. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick; or plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C.

C. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A

Page 121: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 4

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

B. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45 3. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to

reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.

C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m).

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

Page 122: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 5

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for placing concrete.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

D. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches (100 mm) high unless otherwise indicated; and extend

base not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.

Page 123: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 6

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor them into structural concrete substrate.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

Page 124: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 7

END OF SECTION 033053

Page 125: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033053 - 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 126: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous framing and reinforcement.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H) or ST50H (ST340H. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

B. Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 33 (230), Class 1. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

Page 127: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 2

2.2 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and blocking. 3. Anchor clips. 4. Gusset plates. 5. Stud kickers and knee braces. 6. Joist hangers and end closures. 7. Hole reinforcing plates.

2.3 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B ASTM A 780.

Page 128: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 3

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

Page 129: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

Page 130: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 5

H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 054000

Page 131: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 132: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items:

1. Floors. 2. Walls and partitions. 3. Smoke barriers. 4. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Sections specifying conduit penetrations.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

1. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Project Manager that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items

B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment

Page 133: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2

or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

Page 134: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

C. Notify Project Manager and inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: : Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated on Drawings.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

Page 135: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4

2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings Corp. 7. Isolatek International. 8. Nelson Firestop Products. 9. NUCO Industries. 10. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 11. Specified Technologies Inc.

D. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

E. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

F. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars.

Page 136: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5

5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

E. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Page 137: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

Page 138: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m).

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words: "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected through-penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out

Page 139: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 8

and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1226. 2. F-Rating: 3 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 5. L-Rating at 400 Deg. F (204 Deg. C): Less than 4 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 6. Type of Fill Materials: Mineral wool batt insulation, sealant.

B. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-1054. 2. F-Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 5. L-Rating at 400 Deg. F (204 Deg. C): Less than 4 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 6. Type of Fill Materials: Mineral wool batt insulation, sealant.

C. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1513. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. Type of Fill Materials: Mineral wool batt insulation, sealant.

D. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Cable Trays with Electric Cables and Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-8143. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. Type of Fill Materials: Mineral wool batt insulation, sealant.

E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Groupings of Penetrants including Cable Trays with Electric Cables and/or Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-8013. 2. F-Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 5 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 5. L-Rating at 400 Deg. F (204 Deg. C): Less than 2 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 6. Type of Fill Materials: fire blocks, putty, sealant.

Page 140: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 9

F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Multiple Electrical Conduits:

1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L-1389. 2. F-Rating: 1 and 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. Type of Fill Materials: Sealant.

G. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: F-A-1016. 2. F-Rating: 2 hours. 3. T-Rating: 0 hours. 4. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than 1 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 5. L-Rating at 400 Deg. F (204 Deg. C): Less than 1 cfm/sq. ft. (cu. m/s per sq. m). 6. W-Rating: Class 1. 7. Type of Fill Materials: Collar device, putty stick, putty and/or sealant.

END OF SECTION 078413

Page 141: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 142: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1

SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems to items and surfaces scheduled.

1. Interior Substrates:

a. Concrete, vertical and horizontal surfaces. b. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). c. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

Page 143: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 2

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Submit Sample on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Sample in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of Sample. 4. Label each Sample for application.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Include color designations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of material.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information:

1. Name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are

Page 144: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3

protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings.

2. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 3. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the coating system descriptions by shortened versions of their names shown in parenthesis:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 2. Carboline Company (Carboline). 3. Sherwin Williams; Industrial and Marine Coatings (S-W).

4. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the High-Performance Coating Schedule.

2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within the paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

Page 145: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 4

C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high-performance coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

2.3 COLORS

A. Colors:

1. Primer Color: To match finish color or capable of being hidden by finish color. 2. Finish Color: To match Sherwin-Williams Slate Grey BG62A213.

2.4 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEM

A. Concrete sealer for the floors and raised curbs of mechanical and electrical rooms:

1. Moderate Environment (High-Gloss Finish): Minimum of one finish coat over an intermediate coat and a primer.

a. Primer: Epoxy primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.

1) Carboline: 890 2-Component Epoxy. 2) Moore: M43-00/M44-84 Acrylic Epoxy Clear Gloss Coating. 3) S-W: Heavy Duty Epoxy B67W300 Series/B60V3. 4) Tnemec: Series 84 H. S. Epoxy.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 0.051 to 0.127 mm (2.0 to 5.0 mils

1) Carboline: 890 2-Component Epoxy. 2) Moore: M43/M44 Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating. 3) S-W: Tile Clad II High Solids B62WZ Series B60VZ70. 4) Tnemec: Intermediate coat not required.

c. Topcoat: High-gloss epoxy applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 0.051 to 0.127 mm (2.0 to 5.0 mils).

1) Carboline: 890 2-Component Epoxy. 2) Moore: M43/M44 Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating. 3) S-W: Tile Clad II High Solids B62WZ Series B60VZ70. 4) Tnemec: Series 84 H. S. Epoxy.

Page 146: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.

1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding:

a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions. b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.

2. Notify Project Manager about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified over substrates primed by others.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

Page 147: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 6

1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

2. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified..

1. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces.

a. Use abrasive methods, if recommended by coating manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or alkalinity of mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Use abrasive methods, if recommended by coating manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed

surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. 3. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures

and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

5. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

Page 148: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 7

6. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.

E. Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appropriate size for the surface or item being coated.

a. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written instructions permit using roller or mechanical applicators .

b. Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. c. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or

other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by manufacturer's written instructions and governing regulations.

a. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

b. Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. c. Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats

in one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.

F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated by others.

1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing.

Page 149: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 8

H. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE – NOT USED

END OF SECTION 099600

Page 150: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1

SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage (2001 to 4,160 V) electrical distribution systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables.

B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.

C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory, signed by the manufacture’s certifying that the cables comply with requirements specified in Part 2 article, “Source Quality Control.”

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.

Page 151: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 2

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single manufacture.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined ion NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project Manager’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CABLES

A. Cable Type: Type MV 105.

B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC 74, and ICEA S-97-682.

C. Conductor: Copper.

D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.

E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound.

F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene – propylene rubber. Complying with AEIC CS6 and NEMA WC 8.

1. Voltage Rating: 15 kV.

2. Insulation Thickness: 133% insulation level.

G. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.

Page 152: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 3

H. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated, polyethylene jacket.

I. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for connections between aluminum to copper conductors.

B. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors.

2.4 SOLID TERMINATIONS

A. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation.

1. Compound-filled, cast-metal-body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with external plastic jacket.

2. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated conductors.

B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class is equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations. 1. Class 3 Terminations: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector.

2.5 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS

A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.

B. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case.

2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES

A. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil splicing tape, rated for 130 deg C operation. Minimum 3/4 inch wide.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-93-639/ NEMA WC 74 and ICEA-S 97-682 before shipping.

Page 153: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.

B. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.

3. Use pull-in guides, cable feeders, and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables during installation.

4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape.

C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

D. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.

F. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling.

G. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits.

H. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal cable ends with standard kits.

I. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected.

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. 3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal.

J. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings, and hardware.

L. Identify cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination, pull point, and junction

Page 154: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 5

box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test voltage.

4. Perform Partial Discharge test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3 and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Perform Dissipation Factor test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3 and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units and retest as specified above.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 260513

Page 155: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 156: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 2000 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 2000 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

Page 157: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable used in VFC circuits.

E. Conductors: Copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

1. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for

Type THHN/THWN-2 Type USE.

F. Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC, metal-clad cable, Type MC Type USE with ground wire.

1. VFC Cable: Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.

Page 158: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3

9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway, Type SE multiconductor cable.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG.

G. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Page 159: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Refer to drawings for conduit penetration details.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

Page 160: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench.

c. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent

conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3. Consider the cost and benefit of infrared scanning of cable and conductor splices before retaining "Initial Infrared Scanning" Subparagraph below.

4. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements.

Page 161: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 6

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 260519

Page 162: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1

SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Low-voltage control cabling. 2. Control-circuit conductors. 3. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

Page 163: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches (1520 mm) or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.4 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. Multi-pair, twisted No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

Page 164: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 3

2.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Encore Wire Corporation. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Southwire Company.

B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2 in raceway, complying with UL 83.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 83.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway complying with UL 83.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.

2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches (102 mm) square by 2-1/8 inches (53 mm) deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) of the finished wall surface.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

Page 165: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 4

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.

2. Cables may not be spliced. 3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more

than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

5. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating.

7. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.

8. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 9. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).

2. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

Page 166: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 5

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3

inches (75 mm). c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6

inches (150 mm).

4. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag.

3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 GROUNDING

A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Page 167: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 6

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

B. Document data for each measurement.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 260523

Page 168: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems, based on NFPA 70B.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

Page 169: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 4. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall

Page 170: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3

comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Receptacle circuits. 3. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Flexible raceway runs.

Page 171: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal..

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Motor Control Centers or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s). 2. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify, Government promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION 260526

Page 172: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

Page 173: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

Page 174: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless] steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

Page 175: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits, systems and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1 EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-6. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

Page 176: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 260529

Page 177: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 178: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters

3. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

Page 179: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 5. Republic Conduit. 6. Southwire Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 8. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 9. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: Steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

H. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

Page 180: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 14. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

Page 181: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

G. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep and 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep

H. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

J. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 4. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC

Page 182: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R in damp or wet locations.

B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-deg.ree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

Page 183: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6

L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Retain "Surface Raceways" Paragraph below if applicable.

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg. F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg. F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg. F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg. F

temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg. F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

Page 184: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC 2. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connectors.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

W. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

X. Do not run conduct horizontally in any partition wall.

Y. Do not install conduit in concrete under floor, slab, or grade.

Z. Encase raceway with concrete under roadway.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed factory finished raceway and boxes inspect exposed finished and repair damaged finished.

END OF SECTION 260533

Page 185: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 186: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70 and OSHA standards..

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label to illustrate lettering style, and graphic features of identification products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Major items of electrical equipment and major components shall be permanently marked as indicated below. Designation of motors shall coincide with their designation in the motor control center or panel. Unless otherwise specified, identification labels shall be made of laminated plastic tape with self-adhesive blue letters on white background. Labels shall be of the type made with an electronic label maker. In all instances, the identification labels shall be installed in a conspicuous location. The front of each panelboard, motor control center, switchgear, and switchboard shall have a label to indicate the phase letter, and corresponding color and arrangement of the phase conductors. The following equipment, as a minimum, shall be provided with identification labels:

Page 187: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2

1. Minimum 101.6-mm (4-inch) Wide Tape with 25.4- mm (1-inch) High Letters:

a. Medium voltage interrupter switches. b. Transformers. c. Motor control center (main labels). d. Switchgear (main labels). e. Switchboards.

2. Minimum 25.4-mm (1-inch) Wide Tape with 19-mm (3/4-inch) High Letters:

a. Safety switches. b. Motor control centers (individual compartments). c. Equipment enclosures. d. Automatic transfer switch. e. Panelboards.

3. Minimum 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) Wide Tape with 6.4-mm (1/4-inch) High Letters:

a. Control power transformers. b. Control devices. c. Instrument transformers. d. Door switches.

4. 12.7-mm (1/2-inch) Wide Tape with 6.4-mm (1/4-inch) High Letters. Coordinate colors with Owner.

a. Light switch covers. b. Receptable covers.

B. Each panel, section, or unit in motor control centers, switchgear or similar assemblies shall be provided with a label, in addition to labels listed above, for individual compartments in the respective assembly, including labels which identify “future,” and “spare,” or “equipped spaces”.

2.2 POWER SOURCE IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. In addition to the above, labels shall be provided on the following equipment indicating the source of power and circuit number:

1. Panelboards. 2. Receptacles. 3. Manual starters. 4. Transfer switches. 5. Motor control centers. 6. Light switches. 7. Occupancy sensors. 8. Transformers. 9. Safety switches. 10. Instrument transformers.

Page 188: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3

2.3 CABLE AND WIRE LABELS & MARKER BANDS

A. Power & Control Wires (600 volt)

1. Labels: preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl-coated cloth wire and terminal markers with clearly printed letters and numbers.

2. Labels shall be used on sizes #2 awg and smaller and shall contain circuit number. 3. Aluminum or Brass, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands shall be cut from 0.4-mm

(0.014-inch) thick metal sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket.

4. Marker bands shall be used on cables larger than #2 awg and shall contain the following information:

a. Circuit number. b. Circuit voltage. c. Cable destination.

5. Labels and Marker Bands are required within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made.

B. Power Cables (above 600 volt)

1. Aluminum or Brass, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.4-mm (0.014-inch) thick metal sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket.

2. Each marker band shall contain the following information:

a. Cable type. b. Conductor size. c. Circuit number. d. Circuit voltage. e. Cable destination. f. Phase identification.

3. Marker bands shall be used within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made and within each manhole.

C. Signal Wire & Cables

1. Labels shall be: preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl-coated cloth wire and terminal markers with clearly printed letters and numbers.

2. Labels shall be used on sizes 9-mm (3/8–inch) diameter and smaller and shall contain identification number.

3. Aluminum or Brass, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands shall be cut from 0.4-mm (0.014-inch) thick metal sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket.

4. Each marker band shall contain the following information:

a. Cable type. b. Conductor size and number of conductors or fiber type and number of fibers

Page 189: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4

c. Identification number and cable destination.

5. Marker bands shall be used within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made. Marker band shall be used on all signal cable sizes and groups within each manhole.

2.4 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. Bands of colored adhesive tape shall be provided to identify power, control and signal systems. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material and oil film before applying. Locate bands within 150 mm 6 inches at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 10 foot maximum intervals, and at entry to or exit from switchboards, panelboards, transformers, disconnects, motor controllers, and junction and pullboxes.

B. System Color Code:

1. Non-Secure Communications: Black 2. Secure Communication: White. 3. Technical Power: Orange. 4. Utility Power: Green. 5. Emergency Power and Life Safety Code: Yellow. 6. Fire Damper Device: Red/Green. 7. Fire Alarm System Power: Red. 8. Security: Purple. 9. FMCS/HVAC Control Power: Brown. 10. Public Address System Power: Blue. 11. CATV Power: Silver.

C Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.

1. Not less than 150-mm (6-inches) wide by 0.1-mm (4-mils) thick. 2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 3. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.

1. Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for galvanized surfaces.

2. Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Page 190: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5

A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment or as indicated on Drawings.

B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

E. Circuits with More Than 600V: Identify raceway with “DANGER--HIGH VOLTAGE” in black letters 51 mm (2 inches) high, stenciled with paint at 3-m (10-foot) intervals over a continuous, painted orange background.

F. Install painted identification according to manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows:

1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material and oily films before painting. 2. Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface. 3. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.

G. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange background. Install on exterior of door or cover.

H. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install Labels externally.

1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.

I. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 150 to 200 mm (6 to 8 inches) below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm (16 inches) overall, use a single line marker. Install line marker for underground wiring for buried cables in raceway.

J. Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for service, feeder and branch-circuit phase conductors:

1. 208/120-V Conductors:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

2. 480/277-V Conductors:

a. Phase A: Yellow. b. Phase B: Brown.

Page 191: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA Novemeber 10, 2016 IFC Submission

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6

c. Phase C: Orange.

3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 6 AWG:

a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 150 mm (6 inches) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 25-mm- (1-inch-) wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

K. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms.

1. Legend: 6.4-mm- (1/4-inch-) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend corresponding to indicated circuit designations.

2. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.

L. Apply identification to conductors as follows:

1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with

source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

END OF SECTION 260553

Page 192: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies, and the setting of these devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals:

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Coordination-study report. 3. Equipment evaluation report. 4. Setting report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Studies shall use SKM PowerTools® for Windows. Coordination with project manager for software version used by site. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An organization experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise testing specified in Part 3.

Page 193: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 2

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide computer software program by SKM Systems Analysis Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 7-4.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval with coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Source Impedance: Utility Company's fault-current contribution as indicated.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project and use approved computer software program to calculate values. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

Page 194: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 3

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with the following:

1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50. 2. Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.

E. Study Report: Enter calculated X/R ratios and interrupting (5-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram of the report. List other output values from computer analysis, including momentary (1/2-cycle), interrupting (5-cycle), and 30-cycle fault-current values for 3-phase, 2-phase, and phase-to-ground faults.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of overcurrent protective devices and conductors by comparing fault-current ratings of these devices with calculated fault-current momentary and interrupting duties.

3.3 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:

a. Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits for cables and equipment.

b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. c. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. e. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. f. Cables. Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor insulation, and

length. g. Busway ampacity and impedance. h. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of

start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.

Page 195: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 4

e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.

f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

B. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-current study and approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices.

D. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

E. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer.

b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

F. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment grounding conductors, and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents.

G. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists

Page 196: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 5

between series devices, including power utility company's upstream devices. Show the following specific information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

3. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of electrical distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to assist in setting of overcurrent protective devices within equipment.

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following device setting and to prepare test reports.

C. Testing: Perform the following device setting and prepare reports:

1. After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of electrical distribution system, perform the following:

a. Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies. b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results.

2. Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and Test Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.

END OF SECTION 260573

Page 197: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 6

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 198: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 1

SECTION 260574 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Project Manager for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

Page 199: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 2

b. Coordination study report. c. Equipment elevation report. d. Setting report.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Field Adjusting Agency.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Studies shall use SKM Powertools for window version 7.

B. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers:

1. SKM System Analysis Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

Page 200: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 3

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in Article in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

G. Arc-Flash Study Output:

1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

H. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:

1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category.

Page 201: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 4

8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm) thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies:

1. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

2. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.

Page 202: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 5

1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume no motor load.

2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except equipment rated 240-V ac or less fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:

1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.

I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings and under "Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call discrepancies to the attention of Project Manager.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.

B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required

Page 203: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 6

to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 6. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 7. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

8. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

9. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

10. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

11. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 12. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic). 13. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and

metallic shield performance parameters.

3.4 LABELING

A. Apply one arc-flash label for 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects and for each of the following locations:

1. Motor-control center. 2. Low-voltage switchboard. 3. Switchgear. 4. Control panel. 5. Switchboard. 6. Panelboard.

3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash Study Specialist.

Page 204: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 7

END OF SECTION 260574

Page 205: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 260574 - 8

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 206: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 1

SECTION 260913 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment and systems used to monitor and control electrical consumption:

1. Multifunction meters. 2. Power meters. 3. Monitoring and control of power distribution equipment. 4. Raceways and boxes. 5. Wires and cables. 6. Identification.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 230923.13 "Energy Meters" for electricity meters for HVAC equipment. 2. Section 262713 "Electricity Metering" for equipment to meter electricity consumption

and demand for tenant submetering.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Active Power: The average power consumed by a unit. Also known as "real power."

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.

C. Apparent (Phasor) Power: "S = VI" where "S" is the apparent power, "V" is the rms value of the voltage, and "I" is the rms value of the current.

D. Firmware: Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is a combination of software and hardware. Storage media with ROMs that have data or programs recorded on them are firmware.

E. KY Pulse: A method of measuring consumption of electricity that is based on a relay operating like a SPST switch.

F. KYZ Pulse: A method of measuring consumption of electricity based on a relay operating like a SPDT switch.

G. LAN: Local area network.

Page 207: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 2

H. L-G: Line to ground.

I. L-L: Line to line.

J. L-N: Line to neutral.

K. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

L. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

M. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

N. N-G: Neutral to ground.

O. Power Factor: The ratio of active power to apparent power, sometimes expressed in percentage.

P. rms: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

Q. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet.

R. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply; used both in singular and plural context.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for power monitoring and control.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection.

a. Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as switchboards, switchgear, and motor-control centers) that describe the following:

1) Location of the meters and gateways, and routing of the connecting wiring. 2) Details of power monitoring and control features to illustrate coordination

among related equipment and power monitoring and control.

3. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data

Page 208: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 3

communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.

5. Surge Suppressors: Data for each device used and where applied.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format on compact disk.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions of reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data. d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer

and service representatives for the system and products. e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging

on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control, and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to do the following:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware. 2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration. 3) Debug hardware problems. 4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on compact disk. j. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information

for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. k. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,

custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software on compact disk.

l. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions.

m. Owner training materials.

Page 209: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 4

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control units to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control of electrical power distribution system(s) that includes the following:

1. Electrical meters that monitor, control, and connect to the data transmission network. 2. LAN: High-speed, multi-access, open, nonproprietary, industry-standard communication

protocols.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 61010-1.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surge Protection: For external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components to protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

Page 210: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 5

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

B. Addressable Devices: All transmitters and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to monitoring and control clients.

C. Backup Power Source:

1. Electrical power distribution equipment served by a backup power source for controls shall have associated power monitoring and control system products that monitor and control such systems and equipment also served from a backup power source.

2.3 CIRCUIT METER AND EXPLORER

A. Description: Separately mounted, modular, permanently installed, solid-state, digital I/O instrument for power monitoring, control, and power quality explorer; complying with UL 61010-1.

1. Provide for metering 4-wire Y, 3-wire Y, and 3-wire delta power systems. 2. Equip the instrument with security lock to protect revenue related metering from

unauthorized and accidental changes.

B. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Indoor installation in non-air-conditioned spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg. F (minus 18 to plus 50 deg. C) dry bulb and 20 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

2. Comply with IEC 60529 degree of protection code of IP42. 3. The circuit meter and monitor shall meet UL 61010-1 overvoltage withstand rating of

CAT IV.

C. Accuracy to the following plus/minus values:

1. Voltage and Current Meter: 0.1 percent of reading plus 0.025 percent of full scale. 2. Power and Energy Meter: 0.2 percent of reading plus 0.025 percent of full scale. 3. Energy Meter: Comply with ANSI C12.20, Class 0.20. 4. Frequency Meter: 0.01 Hz in the range of 45 to 67 Hz. 5. Power Factor: 0.003 from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging.

D. Data Links: 1. RS-485 Modbus RTU protocol, 2 wire connection. 2. Ethernet Modbus/TCP/IP protocol:

a. 10/100BaseTX UTP. RJ-45 connector, 100-m link. b. Fiber-optic 100BaseFX, LC duplex connector, 1300-m link. Multimode 62.5/125-

microsecond, 2000-m link.

Page 211: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 6

c. HTML server, with standard home page and five customizable pages.

3. Firmware and software updates shall be accessible through the communications port.

E. Physical Characteristics:

1. Display: Backlit LCD screen with antiglare and scratch-resistant lens. 2. Display of Metered Values: One screen to show at least four lines of user-selected values

on one screen at the same time. Provide graphical representation of user-selected values. 3. Allow user to select a date/time format and the ability to create additional screens for

user-specified views and custom quantities without overwriting existing standard screens.

F. Sampling Rate:

1. Sample current and voltage to provide rms accuracy to 127th harmonic of the fundamental frequency of 60 Hz.

2. Continuously sample and record voltage and current at a rate not less than 4096samples per cycle, simultaneously on all voltage and current channels of the meter.

G. Measure, record with time stamp, and calculate; and, on request, display the following:

1. Measurements: Instantaneous, in real time, rms to the 63rd harmonic:

a. Voltage: L-L each phase, L-L three-phase average, L-N each phase, L-N three-phase average, and percent unbalanced.

b. Current: Each phase, neutral, ground, three-phase average, apparent rms, and percent unbalanced.

c. Active Power (kW): Each phase and three-phase total. d. Reactive Power (kVAR): Each phase and three-phase total. e. Apparent Power (kVA): Each phase and three-phase total. f. Displacement Power Factor: Each phase and three-phase total. g. Distortion Power Factor: Each phase and three-phase total. h. Frequency. i. K-factor for each phase.

2. THD from measurements simultaneously from the same cycle, through 127th] harmonic:

a. Voltage: L-L each phase, L-L three-phase average, L-N each phase, and L-N three-phase average.

b. Current: Each phase, three-phase average, and neutral. c. Power: Active, reactive, and apparent power including power of up to 41st .

3. Energy: Accumulated, indicate whether in-flow or out-flow, net and absolute values. Store the values in instrument's nonvolatile memory. Provide for storing accumulated energy at user-defined intervals, up to three intervals per day.

a. Active kWh. b. Reactive kVARh. c. Apparent kVAh.

Page 212: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 7

4. Demand:

a. Voltage: L-L each phase, L-L three-phase average, L-N each phase, and L-N three-phase average.

1) Present. 2) Running average. 3) Last completed interval. 4) Peak.

b. Current: Each phase, three-phase average, and neutral.

1) Present. 2) Last completed interval. 3) Minimum. 4) Peak.

c. Active Power (kW): Three-phase totals.

1) Last completed interval. 2) Predicted. 3) Peak. 4) Coincident with peak kVA demand. 5) Coincident with peal kVAR demand.

d. Reactive Power (kVAR): Three-phase totals.

1) Last completed interval. 2) Predicted. 3) Peak. 4) Coincident with peak kW demand. 5) Coincident with peal kVA demand.

e. Apparent Power (kVA): Three-phase totals.

1) Last completed interval. 2) Predicted. 3) Peak. 4) Coincident with peak kW demand. 5) Coincident with peak kVA demand.

f. Distortion Power Factor: Three-phase totals.

1) Last completed interval. 2) Predicted. 3) Peak. 4) Coincident with peak kVA demand. 5) Coincident with peal kVAR demand.

H. Average, Minimum and Maximum Values:

Page 213: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 8

1. Record, date and time stamp, and save the minimum and maximum values of all rms metered values since the last reset.

2. Record, date and time stamp, and save maximum, minimum and average over a user-defined interval for the following metered values:

a. Voltage: L-L each phase, L-L three-phase average, L-N each phase, and L-N three-phase average.

b. Voltage Unbalance: L-L each phase and L-N each phase. c. Current: rms each phase, three-phase average, and calculated neutral current. d. Demand Current: rms each phase and three-phase average. e. Current: Apparent, rms average. f. Active Power (kW): Each phase and three-phase total. g. Reactive Power (kVAR): Each phase and three-phase total. h. Apparent Power (kVA): Each phase and three-phase total. i. Demand Active Power: Each phase and three-phase total. j. Demand Reactive Power: Each phase and three-phase total. k. Demand Apparent Power: Each phase and three-phase total. l. Accumulated Energy: MWh, MVAh, and MVARh. m. Reactive energy (MVARh) by quadrant. n. Power Factor: Three-phase displacement and distortion power factors. o. K-factor for each phase. p. THD L-L and L-N voltages. q. THD current in each phase and neutral. r. Frequency.

I. Power Demand, User Selectable:

1. Thermal Demand: Sliding window updated every second for the present demand and at end of the interval for the last interval. Adjustable window that can be set in 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes.

2. Block Interval with Optional Subintervals: Adjustable for 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes. User-defined parameters for the following block intervals:

a. Sliding block that calculates demand every second, with intervals less than 15 minutes, and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60 minutes. The default setting shall be the 15-minute continuous sliding block.

b. Fixed block that calculates demand at end of the interval. c. Rolling block subinterval that calculates demand at end of each subinterval and

displays it at end of the interval.

3. Demand Calculation Initiated by a synchronization signal. Synchronize demand with clock in the circuit meter and monitor. a. Synchronize demand with receipt of a communication signal. Calculation shall be

configurable as either a block or rolling block calculation. b. Provide for synchronization to the clock in the instrument.

4. Record, date and time stamp, and save the following demand values of all rms metered values since the last reset, including the following:

a. Average demand current, per phase.

Page 214: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 9

b. Peak demand current, per phase. c. Average demand for active power, reactive power, and apparent power. d. Predicted demand for active power, reactive power, and apparent power. e. Peak demand for active power, reactive power, and apparent power.

J. Trend Curves: Provide for recording four trend curves at intervals of one minute, one hour, one day, or one month; and forecast values for the trended parameters:

1. Record minimum, maximum, and average values of eight user-selected parameters as follows:

a. Every second for one minute for the one-minute curve. b. Every minute for one hour for the one-hour curve. c. Every hour for one day for the one-day curve. d. Every day for one month for the one-month curve.

2. Forecast the trended parameters for the following:

a. The next four hours. b. The next four days.

K. Power Analysis Values:

1. THD Voltage: L-L each phase, L-N each phase, and L-N three-phase average. 2. THD Current: Each phase, three-phase average, and neutral current. 3. Total demand distortion. 4. K-factor for each phase. 5. Crest factor, each phase. 6. Displacement power factor. 7. Fundamental voltage, magnitude and angle, each phase. 8. Fundamental currents, magnitude and angle, each phase. 9. Fundamental active power, each phase and three-phase total. 10. Fundamental reactive power, each phase and three-phase total. 11. Harmonic power, each phase and three-phase total. 12. Phase rotation. 13. Voltage and current unbalances. 14. Harmonic magnitudes and angles, each phase. 15. Distortion power. 16. Distortion power factor.

L. Waveform Capture:

1. Steady State Waveform Capture: Manually initiated over the communications network.

a. Capture, record with time stamp, and store voltage and current waveforms at a resolution of 512 samples/cycle for up to 30 seconds.

b. Capture, record with time stamp, and store 512 digitally sampled data points for each cycle of each phase voltage. The number of waveform captures stored onboard shall be user configurable.

Page 215: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 10

c. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve harmonics through the 127th for the following:

1) Voltage: L-N and L-G each phase. 2) Current: Of each phase and neutral current.

d. Captured waveforms shall be recorded from actual circuit performance.

2. Disturbance Waveform Capture:

a. Capture, record with time stamp, and store digitally sampled data points for each cycle of each phase voltage. Disturbance waveform capture may be initiated manually, by an external contact closure, or by an alarm. The captured waveform shall be at a resolution of 512 samples /cycle per second. The number of pre-alarm cycles shall be adjustable.

3. Waveform samples shall be available for transmission over the communications network, for display, archival, and analysis at computer workstations.

M. Flicker Detection.

1. Detect and capture flicker events, defined by IEEE 1453, at three levels: instantaneous, short term, and long term.

2. Display the flicker event as plots of magnitude versus time on semi-log graph background.

N. Sag and Swell Detection and Alarm:

1. Detect and initiate alarm when detecting voltage or current sag and swell.

a. Detect disturbance events of less than half-cycle in length, by monitoring and calculating rms magnitude of each half-cycle.

b. Event detection shall be with user-defined parameters of threshold and delay. The threshold shall be user defined as a fixed or relative set point. With relative set point, the instrument will alarm based on the nominal current or voltage equal to its present average value. The instrument shall automatically adjust the nominal current and voltage values to avoid nuisance alarms caused by gradual daily variations of currents and voltages.

c. When detecting an alarm condition:

1) Initiate disturbance waveform capture. 2) Initiate 100-ms event recording. 3) Recording the disturbance parameters into an onboard alarm log with a date

and time stamp to the millisecond. 4) Causing an operator alarm on the display and transmit the alarm over the

data link. 5) The user shall have the ability to display the voltage sag/swell events on

ITIC or SEMI graphs to quantify the event for accepted industry standards.

O. 100-ms Event Recording: Capture, record with time stamp, and store.

Page 216: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 11

1. Initiate recording by an alarm or external contact closure. 2. User-configured recording, to record for the duration of the alarm up to 300 seconds and

can be delayed for 1 to 10 seconds. 3. Records current per-phase and neutral, voltage L-L each phase and L-N each phase,

active power per-phase and three-phase total, reactive power each phase and three-phase total, apparent power each phase and three-phase total, and true power factor three-phase total.

4. Operate an output relay in the I/O module of the instrument.

P. Harmonics Information:

1. Calculate the harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current in each phase and neutral, through the 127th harmonic. Provide harmonic power flows up to the 41st harmonic for active, reactive, and apparent power.

2. The current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from the same cycle.

3. Report harmonic information as a percentage of the fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.

Q. Alarms:

1. Alarm events may be either user defined or preconfigured by manufacturer from the applicable standards. Provide for multiple levels for each alarm that is based on metered data.

2. The instrument shall calculate the listed key electrical parameters at not less than 100-ms intervals to initiate and record an alarm event. Provide for user-selected range of 1 to 10 seconds of pre-event and up to five minutes of post-event data recording.

3. The following classes of events shall be available to be programmed as alarm events:

a. Over/under current. b. Over/undervoltage. c. Current imbalance. d. Phase loss, current. e. Phase loss, voltage. f. Voltage imbalance. g. Wave shape alarm. h. Over kVA. i. Over kW or kVAR into/out of load. j. Over/under frequency. k. Under power factor, true or displacement. l. Over THD. m. Over K-factor. n. Over demand, current or power. o. Reverse power. p. Phase reversal. q. Status input change. r. End of incremental energy interval. s. End of demand interval. t. Over/under analog inputs. u. Current sag/swell.

Page 217: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 12

v. Voltage sag/swell. w. Transient events.

4. For each over/under metered alarm value, the user shall define a pickup, dropout, and delay.

5. Waveform Alarms:

a. The instrument shall detect anomalous waveform events that are less than half-cycle in length.

b. Provide for the user to set a threshold value and an upper limit to determine whether the waveform triggers an alarm. The threshold value and upper limit shall be a value between 1 and 100. The threshold value is the limit at which a waveform triggers the alarm. The upper limit defines the highest waveform value that triggers a waveform alarm. The settable values are as follows:

1) Phase voltages. 2) N-G voltages. 3) Phase currents. 4) Neutral currents.

c. In response to a waveform alarm, the instrument shall:

1) Log the event and record phase currents and voltages as defined in the 100-ms event recording.

2) Determine the source of the disturbance (upstream or downstream from the meter) and a statistical level of confidence (low, medium, or high) of the accuracy of the source location.

6. Provide four alarm severity levels to allow the user to respond to the most important events first.

7. Indicate an alarm condition on the front panel of the instrument, as well as reported over the data link to designated workstations.

8. The circuit meter and monitor alarms response time shall be not less than the following:

a. Standard, one second. b. High speed, 100 ms. c. Disturbance, half-cycle.

9. Up to four alarms may be combined to give a single result using Boolean algebra operations.

10. Provide e-mail notification of alarm conditions. 11. Automatic Alarm Set-Point Adjustment:

a. The instrument software shall provide for recognizing and learning the characteristics of the normal operation of the electrical power system it is connected to, and to select and adjust alarm set points based on that recognition.

b. The metered data to be recognized and learned, and the period of time for learning for alarms, disturbances, and waveform alarms, shall be set by the user by selection one of the following two modes:

Page 218: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 13

1) Fixed Learning: Initially configured user set points are used during the entire learning period.

2) Dynamic Learning: Initially configured user set points are temporarily replaced by learned set points at the interval specified by the user in the learning setup. The set points continue to be updated at the specified interval until the learning period expires.

c. The learning period shall be user configurable. If the learned set points do not change over a predefined period, the learning process can be stopped and the set points either installed or held for review.

R. EN 50160 Evaluation: Report EN 50160 evaluation data in the following formats: summary of active evaluations, summary of evaluation status, detailed information for each evaluated parameter, and detailed information for each abnormal event.

S. I/O Module: Modular, with multiple I/O options, programmable to accomplish specified performance and one or more spare positions for future. At minimum, the instrument shall provide the following:

1. KYZ Pulse: Solid-state output relay, programmed to generate a standard KYZ pulses for a user-defined increment of metered active energy as follows:

a. User-defined pulse output, associated with kWh. b. Alarm pulse output, which turns on the pulsing at user-defined point.

2. Digital inputs, each having the following operating modes:

a. Normal: Simple on/off digital inputs. b. Demand Interval Synch Pulse Accept a demand synch pulse from a utility demand

meter. c. Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional energy accumulation.

3. Output Relays and Control: Output relays shall have normally open and normally closed contacts and shall operate in response to a user sent command over the data link, or automatically responding to an alarm event. The relays shall be user configured in one of the following listed modes:

a. Normal contact closure where the contacts change state for as long as the signal exists.

b. Latched mode when the contacts change state when a pickup signal is received and are held until a dropout signal is received.

c. Timed mode when the contacts change state when a pickup signal is received and are held for a preprogrammed duration.

d. End of Power Demand Interval: When the relay operates as a synch pulse for other devices.

e. Energy Pulse Output: Relay will pulse quantities used for Absolute kWh, Absolute kVARh, kVAh, kWh In, kVARh In, kWh Out, and kVARh Out.

f. Programmed Output: Relay will operate in response to multiple alarms that are arranged to give a single result using Boolean algebra operations.

Page 219: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 14

T. Onboard Data Logs:

1. Log data, alarms and events, and waveforms in onboard solid-state nonvolatile memory. 2. Onboard data logs shall be available for transmission over the communications network

for display, archival, and analysis at computer workstations on demand. 3. Data Logs, General: User configurable. Automatically stamp each entry to the

millisecond with date and time.

a. Each log entry shall hold data of up to 96 parameters each. b. Each log shall be user configurable to log data at a different user-defined schedule

interval. c. Provide each log with user-defined event or a minimum/maximum condition that

will trigger log file entries. d. Configure log entries to be recorded as Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO), as defined

by the user.

4. Minimum/Maximum Logs:

a. Minimum/Maximum/Average interval log also logs minimum/maximum/average of selected parameters on a selected interval from a user-selected interval length from 1 to 1440 seconds.

b. Minimum/Maximum log shall include the time, date, and value for the minimum and maximum of each of the active-time metered values.

5. Alarm Log: Record time, date, event information, and coincident information for each user-defined and automatically initiated alarm or event. The log capacity shall be not less than 1000 events. Record selected parameters at 100-ms intervals during events and alarms. Automatically stamp each entry to the millisecond with date and time.

6. Waveform Logs: Capture and store waveforms as follows:

a. One cycle, 512 samples, to the 127th harmonic. Manually triggered. b. Adjustable from 8 seconds at 18 samples per cycle, to 264 seconds at 16 samples

per cycle. Triggered manually or by a user set alarm.

U. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Supply: [120-V ac, 60 Hz] <Insert text>. 2. Circuit Connections:

a. Voltage: Measurements autoranging, 0- to 600-V ac L-L, 0- to 347-V ac L-N. Connect to instrument grade potential transformers secondary at 120 V. Meter impedance shall be 2-megohm L-L or greater.

b. Current: Connect to instrument grade current transformer with a metering range of 5 mA to 6 A. Overcurrent tolerance of the instrument shall be 15 A continuous, 50 A for 10 seconds once per hour, and 120 A for one second per hour.

c. Frequency: 45 to 67 Hz. d. Time: Time-synchronize this instrument with the network to a deviation of not

greater than 1 ms.

3. Onboard, Solid-State Nonvolatile Memory: 28 MB.

Page 220: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 15

2.4 MONITORING AND CONTROL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

A. Power Distribution Equipment: Web-enabled, direct connected to the LAN or intranet.

B. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA C12.11 accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

C. Ethernet Connectivity:

1. A multipoint, RS-485 Modbus serial communications network shall be included within the equipment to interconnect breaker trip units, protective relays, drives, and metering devices equipped with communications.

2. Serial communications network shall be wired to an Ethernet server in the incoming section of the equipment. Hardware and cabling required for the connection to the network shall be included within the power distribution equipment.

3. Serial communications devices within the equipment shall be factory addressed and tested to verify reliable communications to the equipment's Ethernet Server.

4. All Data Points required by this specification shall be retrievable using Modbus/ Tcp protocall.

D. Ethernet Gateways:

1. User configurable; complying with UL 60950-1, and IEEE 802.3, Class 3 PoE. 2. Include provisions to set initial Ethernet parameters via a local operator interface, or

standard (RJ-45) Ethernet port, that is accessible from the front of the equipment. Initial setup shall be limited to basic Ethernet addressing parameters, as assigned by Owner.

3. Common Gateway Features:

a. User configurable, with secure password-protected login process. b. Include communications diagnostic information for serial and Ethernet ports as

well as internal health status and memory management information through embedded HTML web pages for viewing using a standard web browser.

c. Include embedded HTML pages providing real-time information from devices connected to the Ethernet gateway's RS-485 port(s) through a standard web browser.

d. Allow firmware upgrades through the communications port.

4. Include a "Quick-Start" guide with the equipment to describe the commissioning process for setting the equipment's Ethernet network address and for ensuring trouble-free data access from any PC on the network, using a standard web browser.

5. Implement a common user interface ("look and feel") across all styles of power equipment.

E. Distribution Equipment Monitoring:

Page 221: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 16

1. Main menu and summary pages, factory configured, to display data for each communicating device within the power equipment lineup.

2. Display Data:

a. Circuit summary page to display circuit name, three-phase average rms current, real power (kW), power factor, and breaker status (if applicable).

b. Load current summary page to display circuit name, and phase a, b, and c rms current values.

c. Demand current summary page to display circuit name, and phase a, b, and c average demand current values.

d. Power summary page to display circuit name, present demand power (kW), peak demand power (kW), and recorded time and date.

e. Energy summary page to display circuit name, real energy (kWh), reactive energy (kVARh), and time/date of last reset.

f. For unit substations equipped with dry-type transformer(s) and microbased temperature controller(s), the circuit summary web page listed above shall be augmented with transformer coil temperatures, phase a, b and c current values, and cooling fan status (on/off).

g. For motor-control centers, the circuit summary web page shall be tailored specifically for this application, to display circuit name, three-phase average rms current, thermal capacity (percentage), drive output frequency (in Hertz, where applicable), and contactor status.

2.5 SYSTEM OPERATOR INTERFACES

A. Operator means of system access shall be through the following:

1. Desktop operator workstation with hardwired connection through LAN port. 2. Portable operator terminal with hardwired connection through LAN port at each meter.

2.6 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power wiring and NFPA 70 Class 1 remote-control and signaling circuits.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for control wiring, RS-232 cable, and NFPA 70 Class 2 remote-control and signaling circuits.

2.7 WIRES AND CABLES

A. Electrical Power Wiring: Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

1. Copper conductors are Type THHN/THWN-2.

B. Control Wiring: Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

Page 222: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 17

1. Optical-Fiber Cable: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer OM3, six-fiber, nonconductive, tight-buffer, optical-fiber cable, with aqua jacket.

2. Twisted Pair Cable: 100-ohm, four-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP), [Category 5e]. 3. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang

faceplate. Coordinate color and labels with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices." 4. RS-485 Cable: Paired, one pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper

conductors. 5. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, No. 20 AWG copper,

minimum.

a. Sheath: PVC; except in plenum-type spaces, use sheath listed for plenums. b. Ordinary Switching Circuits: Three conductors unless otherwise indicated. c. Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors unless

otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Wiring and Cabling Installation:

1. Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power wiring.

2. Comply with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control wiring.

E. Raceways Installation:

1. Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power wiring and NFPA 70 Class 1 remote-control and signaling circuits.

Page 223: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 18

F. Identification Installation:

1. Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power wiring.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with NECA/BICSI 568.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2. Visually inspect UTP and optical-fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination, but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in its "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in its "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

5. Optical-Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.0. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

Page 224: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 19

1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to IEC 61280-4-1.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB

c. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

6. Power Monitoring and Control System Tests.

a. Test Analog Signals:

1) Check analog voltage signals using a precision voltage meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

2) Check analog current signals using a precision current meter at zero, 50, and 100 percent.

3) Check resistance signals for temperature sensors at zero, 50, and 100 percent of operating span using a precision-resistant source.

b. Test Digital Signals:

1) Check digital signals using a jumper wire. 2) Check digital signals using an ohmmeter to test for contact making or

breaking.

c. I/O Control Loop Tests:

1) Test every I/O point to verify that safety and operating control set points are as indicated and as required to operate controlled system safely and at optimum performance.

2) Test every I/O point throughout its full operating range. 3) Test every control loop to verify that operation is stable and accurate. 4) Adjust control loop proportional, integral, and derivative settings to achieve

optimum performance while complying with performance requirements indicated. Document testing of each control loop's precision and stability via trend logs.

5) Test and adjust every control loop for proper operation according to sequence of operation.

6) Test software and hardware interlocks for proper operation. 7) Operate each analog point at the following:

a) Upper quarter of range. b) Lower quarter of range. c) At midpoint of range.

8) Exercise each binary point. 9) For every I/O point in the system, read and record each value at operator

workstation, at controller, and at field instrument simultaneously. Value displayed at operator workstation and at field instrument shall match.

Page 225: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 20

10) Prepare and submit a report documenting results for each I/O point in the system, and include in each I/O point a description of corrective measures and adjustments made to achieve desire results.

C. Wiring and cabling will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 FINAL REVIEW

A. Submit written request to Architect Construction Manager when the power monitoring and control system is ready for final review. Written request shall state the following:

1. The system has been thoroughly inspected for compliance with Contract Documents and found to be in full compliance.

2. The system has been calibrated, adjusted, and tested and found to comply with requirements of operational stability, accuracy, speed, and other performance requirements indicated.

3. The system monitoring and control of electrical distribution systems results in operation according to sequences of operation indicated.

4. The system is complete and ready for final review.

B. Review by Construction Manager will be made after receipt of written request. A field report shall be issued to document observations and deficiencies.

C. Take prompt action to remedy deficiencies indicated in field report and submit a second written request when all deficiencies have been corrected. Repeat process until no deficiencies are reported.

D. Final review shall include a demonstration to parties participating in final review.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the power monitoring and control system.

B. On-Site Training:

1. Owner will provide conditioned classroom or workspace with ample desks or tables, chairs, power, and data connectivity for instructor and each attendee.

2. Instructor shall provide training materials, p used in training. 3. Provide as much of training located on-site as deemed feasible and practical by Project

Manager. 4. On-site training shall include regular walk-through tours, as required, to observe each

unique product type installed with hands-on review of operation, calibration, and service requirements.

5. The operator workstation provided with the system shall be used in training. If operator workstation is not indicated, provide a temporary workstation to convey training content.

Page 226: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 21

3.7 At Completion of Training:

A. Staff familiar with the system installed are capable of demonstrating operation of the system during final review.

B. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Accuracy and calibration of 10I/O points randomly selected by reviewers. If review finds that some I/O points are not properly calibrated and not satisfying performance requirements indicated, additional I/O points may be selected by reviewers until total I/O points being reviewed that satisfy requirements equals quantity indicated.

2. Reporting of alarm conditions for randomly selected alarms, including different classes of alarms, to ensure that alarms are properly received by operators and operator workstations.

3. Trends, summaries, logs, and reports set-up for Project. 4. Software's ability to communicate with controllers, operator workstations, and uploading

and downloading of control programs. 5. Software's ability to edit control programs off-line. 6. Data entry to show Project-specific customizing capability including parameter changes. 7. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and

direct access to graphics. 8. Execution of digital and analog commands in graphic mode. 9. Spreadsheet and curve plot software and its integration with database. 10. Online user guide and help functions. 11. For Each Meter:

a. Memory: Programmed data, parameters, trend, and alarm history collected during normal operation is not lost during power failure.

b. Operator Interface: Ability to connect directly to each meter with a portable operator workstation.

c. Wiring Labels: Match control drawings. d. Network Communication: Ability to locate a meter on the network.

Communication architecture matches Shop Drawings. e. Nameplates and Tags: Accurate and permanently attached to control panel doors,

instrument, actuators, and devices.

END OF SECTION 260913

Page 227: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 260913 - 22

THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 228: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 1

SECTION 261116.11 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes secondary unit substations, each consisting of medium-voltage primary incoming section, transformer section, and low-voltage secondary switchgear section, with the following features:

1. Indoor enclosure 2. Medium-voltage, metal-enclosed switchgear section. 3. Dry-type transformer.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for requirements for terminating cables in incoming section of substation.

2. Section 260913 “Electrical Power Monitoring and Controls” for communication features of power distribution system devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BIL: Basic insulation level.

B. MCC: Motor-control center.

C. NETA ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

D. PCB: Polychlorinated biphenyl.

E. RTD: Resistance temperature device.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

Page 229: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer–installed and field–installed wiring.

2. Dimensioned plans and elevations showing major components and features.

a. Include a plan view and cross section of equipment base, showing clearances, manufacturer's recommended workspace that accounts for breaker service and removal, and locations of penetrations for grounding and conduits.

3. One-line diagram. 4. List of materials. 5. Nameplate legends. 6. The material, size and number of bus bars, and current rating for each bus, including

mains and branches of phase, neutral, and ground buses. 7. Short-time and short-circuit current ratings of secondary unit substations and

components. 8. Ratings of individual protective devices.

C. Time-Current Characteristic Curves: For overcurrent protective devices.

D. Primary Fuses: Submit recommendations and size calculations.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings for Indoor Installations:

1. Location plan, showing heavy equipment or truck access paths for maintenance and replacement.

2. Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved.

3. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of secondary unit substation, conduit entries, and grounding equipment locations.

4. Location of lighting fixtures, sprinkler piping and heads, ducts, and diffusers.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Certificates: For secondary unit substations, signed by product manufacturer. Certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Factory test reports. Written reports specified in part 2.

E. Field quality-control reports. Written reports specified in part 3.

Page 230: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 3

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For secondary unit substations and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Specified in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures.”

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spare Fuses: Six of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used, except for medium-voltage fuses. Include spares for the following:

a. Primary disconnect fuses. b. Potential transformer fuses. c. Control power fuses.

2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: Three half-pint containers of paint matching enclosure's exterior finish. 4. Primary Switch Contact Lubricant: One container. 5. One set of spare mounting gaskets for bushings, handholes, and the gasket between relief

cover and flange of pressure-relief device.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to the Project Manager.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain secondary unit substation through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawing indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of secondary unit substations and are based on specific project requirements.

D. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Project Manager, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C2.

F. Comply with IEEE C37 .121.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

Page 231: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 4

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in shipping splits in sizes that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Coordinate delivery of secondary unit substations to allow movement into designated space.

C. Store secondary unit substation components protected from weather and so condensation does not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Handle secondary unit substation components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use factory-installed lifting provisions.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied facilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements and indicated:

1. Notify Government Representative 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Government Representative‘s written

permission. 3. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements.

B. Service Conditions: The unit substation shall be suitable for operation under services conditions specified as usual service conditions in IEEE C37.121.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of secondary unit substations with other construction that penetrates floors and ceiling, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire –suppression system components.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor –bolt inserts into bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Eaton Corporation b. General Electrical Company c. Siemens Industry Inc. d. Square D by Schneider Electrical

Page 232: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 5

e. Others with approval.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Medium-voltage, primary incoming section; transformer section; and low-voltage secondary switchgear section; and including coordinated circuit breakers, fusible switches, and metering components.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with IEEE C2. 3. Comply with IEEE C37.121. 4. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Indoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.

B. Enclosure Finish: Provide factory–applied finish in manufacturer’s standard grey over rust–inhibiting of primer of treated surface.

C. Connections between the primary device and transformer shall be cable and between the transformer and secondary shall be flexible bus braid unless noted otherwise.

D. Indoor Enclosure: Steel.

2.4 INCOMING SECTION

A. INCOMING Line: Enclosed, air –interrupter, primary switch.

1. Three pole, single throw, dead front, metal enclosed, with a manual storage energy operator, with fuses, complying with IEEE C37.20.3.

2. Interlocking system to prevent fuse access door from being opened unless switch is open. 3. Phase Barriers: Located between blades of each phase, designed for easy removal,

allows visual inspection of switch components when barrier is in place. 4. Window: Permits viewing switch-blade position when door is closed. 5. Accessory Set Tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test,

inspection, maintenances, and operation, Include fuse-handling tool as recommended by switch gear manufacturer.

6. Continuous – Current Rating: 600 A. 7. Short- Circuit Rating:

a. Short-time monetary asymmetrical fault rating of 40 kA. b. 2 -second symmetrical rating of 25- kA RMS. c. Fault close asymmetrical rating of 40 kA.

Page 233: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 6

2.5 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TERMINAL COMPARTMENT SECTION

A. Primary Incoming Section: Terminal assembly with adequate space for incoming-cable terminations and surge arresters, complying with NEMA SG 4 and meeting thermal, mechanical, and dielectric requirements specified for the transformer section.

B. Ratings: Suitable for application in three-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.

C. Ratings: Suitable for application three-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded – neutral system.

D. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution Class; metal-oxide-visitor type, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any disconnecting device. 1. Rating: 6kV 2. MCOV: 5.1kV

2.6 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR SECTION

A. Metal-enclosed, air-interrupter switchgear, with fuses, complying with IEEE C37.20.3. Eaton MVS –ND OR approved equal.

B. Ratings: Comply with IEEE C37.04; and suitable for application in three-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system. 1. System Details:

a. Voltage Class: 15KV b. System Voltage: 4.16KV c. Wires: 3 d. System Ground: Solid e. BIL: 60KV

2. Enclosure Details: a. Enclosure Type: INDOOR b. Mimic Bus: Plastic Adhesive c. Exterior Color: ANSI-61 Light Grey d. Interior Color: ANSI-61 Light Grey

3. Bus Details: a. Material: Silver-Plated Copper b. Bus Support Insulation: Polyester c. Bus Insulation: Fully Insulated d. Rating: 600A, continuous

4. Certification: UL

C. Interrupter Switches: Stationary, gang operated and suitable for application at maximum short-circuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.

1. Rating: 600A continuous duty and load break. 2. Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas released into

the enclosure. 3. Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure, with copper

switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism.

Page 234: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 7

4. Phase Barriers: Full length of switchblades and fuses for each pole; designed for easy removal; allow visual inspection of switch components if barrier is in place.

5. Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals.

a. Fuse Mounts: Single-frame mounted and de-energized when switch is open.

6. Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening of switch compartment door unless switchblades are open, and prevent closing switch if door is open.

7. Window: Permits viewing switchblade positions when door is closed. 8. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test,

inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include fuse-handling tool as recommended by switchgear manufacturer.

D. Fuses: Sizes recommended by secondary unit substation manufacturer, temperature-rise specification, and cycle loading.

1. Current-Limiting Fuses: Full-range, fast-replaceable, current-limiting type that will operate without explosive noise or expulsion of gas, vapor, or foreign matter from tube.

2. Indicator integral with each fuse to show when it has blown. 3. Spares: Include three fuses in use and three spare fuses in storage clips in each switch.

E. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution Class; metal-oxide-varistor type, with ratings as indicated, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any disconnecting device.

2.7 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMER SECTION

A. Description: IEEE C57.12.01, IEEE C57.12.50, IEEE C57.12.51, IEEE C57.12.52, and dry-type, two-winding, secondary unit substation transformer.

B. Primary Incoming Section: Transformer cover-mounted bushings. The bushings shall meet thermal, mechanical, and dielectric requirements as specified for the transformer section.

C. Style: Indoor, ventilated vacuum-pressure, impregnated type, and with insulation system rated at 220 deg C with an 80deg C average winding temperature rise above a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg C.

D. Cooling System: Class AA, air cooled, complying with IEEE C57.12.01.

E. Insulation Materials: IEEE C57.12.01, rated 220deg C.

1. Insulation Temperature Rise: 80deg C, maximum rise above 40 deg C.

F. BIL: 30 x 60HV / 10LV KV.

G. Voltage: Dual 4,160V and 13,200V primary, 480Y/ 277V Secondary.

H. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage at 13,200V.

Page 235: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 8

I. Impedance: 5.75 percent nominal.

J. High-Temperature Alarm: Sensor at transformer with local audible and visual alarm and contacts for remote alarm.

2.8 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION TERMINAL COMPARTMENT

A. Low-Voltage Terminal Compartment: Bus bars mounted on standoff insulators

2.9 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION SWITCHGEAR

A. The secondary distribution section shall be drawout, circuit breaker low-voltage switchgear, complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

B. Switchgear Structure:

1. Match and align the front of the switchgear. 2. Allow the following circuit-breaker functions to be performed when the compartment

door is closed:

a. Operate manual charging system. b. Open and close the circuit breaker. c. Examine and adjust the trip unit. d. Read the breaker nameplate.

3. Locate instrumentation transformers within the breaker cell, and make front accessible and removable.

C. Switchgear Bus:

1. Use bus bars to connect compartments and vertical sections. Cable connections are not permitted.

2. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of section. 3. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with

pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. 4. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare

circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers. 5. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum

conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections. 6. Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus. 7. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 8. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped

with compression type two-hole cable lugs, number and size to accommodate feeder on contract drawings for outgoing circuit conductors.

9. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4-by-2 inches.

Page 236: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 9

10. Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors.

11. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.

12. Provide for future extensions from end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

D. Circuit-Breaker Compartment:

1. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in "connected," "test," and "disconnected" positions. Include the following features:

a. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from "connected" position when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in "connected," "test," or "disconnected" position.

b. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: Permit the racking of an open circuit breaker to or from "connected," "test," and "disconnected" positions only when the compartment door is closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. Permit the manual withdrawal of an open circuit breaker to a position for removal from the structure. When the compartment door is open, status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

1) Test Position: Primary disconnects disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

2) Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

2. Primary Disconnect: Mount on the stationary part of the compartment. The disconnect shall consist of a set of contacts extending to the rear through an insulating support barrier, and of corresponding moving finger contacts on the power circuit-breaker studs, which engage in only the "connected" position. The assembly shall provide multiple silver-to-silver full floating, spring-loaded, high-pressure-point contacts with uniform pressure on each finger. Load studs shall connect to bus extensions that terminate in solderless terminals in the rear cable compartment.

3. Secondary Disconnect: Floating terminals mounted on the stationary part of the compartment that engage mating contacts at the front of the breaker. Disconnecting devices shall be gold plated, and engagement shall be maintained in the "connected" and "test" positions.

E. Circuit Breakers:

1. Comply with IEEE C37.13 and UL 1066. 2. Ratings: For continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit

breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear. 3. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating

mechanism with the following features:

a. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. b. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.

Page 237: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 10

c. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, and the operator's choice of manual charging.

1) Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation. 2) Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

d. Operation counter.

4. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

a. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

b. Temperature compensation that ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.

c. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. d. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units, or sensors on

circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods. e. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum." f. Pickup Points:

1) Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short-time-trip function for switchable I-squared-t operation.

2) Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.

g. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-delay bands; adjustable current pickup.

1) Arrange to provide protection for four-wire circuit or system.

h. Arc-Flash maintenance mode selectable from trip unit.

5. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

6. Auxiliary Contacts:

a. Contacts and switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, sufficient for interlocking and remote indication of circuit-breaker position.

b. Spare auxiliary switches, at least two, unless other quantity is indicated. Each switch shall consist of two Types A and two Type B contacts wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary circuit-breaker compartment.

7. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in "disconnected" position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

8. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

Page 238: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 11

F. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main. All indicator lights to be LED type.

2.10 LOW-VOLTAGE INSTRUMENT SECTION

A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA C 12.11 Accuracy Class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Burden and Accuracy Class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems.

1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

2. Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus

or minus 2 percent. i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours, plus or minus 2 percent; stored values

unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours. j. Manufacturer: Eaton Power Expert PXM6000 or equal.

3. Communications module suitable for remote monitoring of meter quantities and functions. Interface communication and metering requirements according to Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

4. Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs.

D. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices.

E. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

Page 239: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 12

F. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between "connected" and "disconnected" positions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.

3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

4. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted at top front of switchgear and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each size of drawout circuit breaker installed.

5. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

2.11 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90. Conduct switchgear and switchboard tests according to NEMA C 37.51.

B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each secondary unit substation:

1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.

2. Ratios on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 3. Polarity and phase relation on the rated voltage connection. 4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection and on tap

extreme connections. 7. Applied potential. 8. Induced potential. 9. Owner will witness all required factory tests. Notify COR at least 60 days before date of

tests and indicate their approximate duration.

Page 240: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 13

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit substations and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders will

have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for secondary unit substation installation.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at secondary unit substation location.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NECA 400, NECA 410, NECA 430, and NEMA SG 11.

B. Install secondary unit substations on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Anchoring: Tack –weld or bolt secondary unity substation components to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete base. Installation sills level and grout flush with floor or base.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Install the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 ft. apart.

2. Install arc-flash warning labels specified in Section 260574"Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study."

Page 241: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 14

B. Operating Instructions: Frames printed operating instructions for secondary unit substation, including key interlocking, control sequences, elementary single-line diagram, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of secondary unit substation.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. At Interior Locations: For grounding to grounding electrodes, use bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to the transformer enclosure and then to the grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors. Keep leads as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector.

2. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation and before energizing, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Vacuum interiors of secondary unit substation sections.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Inspection field assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical

connections for compliance with requirements. 2. Test and adjusts controls and safeties. Replace damages and malfunctioning controls and

equipment. 3. Test Reports: Prepare written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

B. General Field Testing Requirements:

Page 242: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 15

1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B Ch. "Testing and Test Methods." 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance

with test parameters. 3. After installing secondary unit substation but before primary is energized, verify that

grounding system at the substation is tested at the specified value or less. 4. After installing secondary unit substation and after electrical circuitry has been energized,

test for compliance with requirements. 5. Set field adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as indicated. 6. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical tests according to NETA ATS,

Section 7, as it applies to all installed systems and devices. Certify compliance with the following test parameters: a. Air- Interrupted Switch: Section 7.5. b. Transformers: Section 7.2. c. Secondary Distribution Section Circuit Breaker: Section 7.6. d. Protective Relays: Section 7.9. e. Instruction Transformers: Section 7.10. f. Metering: Section 7.11.

7. Verify equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents. 8. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following two

methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter to compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 10. Prepare test and inspection reports. Record as-left set points of all adjustable devices.

C. Switchgear Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required area clearances. c. Verify the unit is clean and shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation

shipped inside cubicles have been removed. d. Verify that fuse and circuit-breaker sizes and types correspond to Drawings and

coordination study as well as to the address of the circuit breaker that is used to identify it in microprocessor-communication software.

e. Verify that current and voltage-transformer ratios correspond to Drawings. f. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock

systems.

Page 243: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 16

1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed devices.

2) Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.

g. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.

h. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. i. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation. j. Exercise all active components. k. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation. l. Verify that filters are in place and vents are clear. m. Inspect control power transformers as follows:

1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, connection tightness, defective wiring, and overall general condition.

2) Verify that primary- and secondary-fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match Drawings and comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts and interlocks.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform dc voltage insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground, for one minute. If the temperature of the bus is other than plus or minus 20 deg. C, adjust the resulting resistance as provided in NETA ATS, Table 100.11.

1) Insulation-resistance values of bus insulation shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Investigate and correct values of insulation resistance less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

2) Do not proceed to the dielectric-withstand-voltage tests until insulation-resistance levels are raised above minimum values.

b. Perform a dielectric-withstand-voltage test on each bus section, each phase-to-ground with phases not under test grounded, according to manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer has no recommendation for this test, it shall be conducted according to NETA ATS, Table 100.2. Apply the test voltage for one minute.

1) If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric-withstand-voltage test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test.

c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state components or control devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation.

Page 244: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 17

1) Minimum insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than 2 megohms.

d. Voltage Transformers:

1) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Verify correct potential at all devices.

2) Verify secondary voltages by energizing the primary winding with system voltage.

e. Perform current-injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of switchgear.

1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum current of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit.

2) Perform current tests by primary injection with magnitudes such that a minimum of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct magnitude of current at each device in the circuit.

D. Instrument Transformer Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements. c. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit

wiring. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide contact. f. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding

operation. g. Verify correct primary- and secondary-fuse sizes for voltage transformers. h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving

and sliding surfaces.

2. Electrical Tests of Current Transformers:

a. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and its secondary wiring with respect to ground at 1000-V dc for one minute. For units with solid-state components that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation-resistance values of instrument transformers shall not be less than values shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

b. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer according to IEEE C57.13.1. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.

c. Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method according to IEEE C57.13.1. Ratio errors shall comply with IEEE C57.13.

d. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications according to IEEE C57.13.1. Excitation results shall match the curve supplied by the manufacturer or shall comply with IEEE C57.13.1.

Page 245: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 18

e. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals according to IEEE C57.13.1. The measured burdens shall match the instrument transformer Accuracy Class rating.

f. Perform insulation-resistance tests on the primary winding with the secondary grounded. Test voltages shall comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. The insulation-resistance value shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

g. Perform dielectric-withstand-voltage tests on the primary winding with the secondary grounded. Test voltages shall comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.9. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application, the primary winding is considered to have passed the test.

h. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests according to test equipment manufacturer's published data. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with test equipment manufacturer's published data.

i. Verify that current-transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only one grounding point according to IEEE C57.13.3.

3. Electrical Tests of Voltage and Potential Transformers:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Apply the test voltage for one minute according to NETA ATS, Table 100.5. For units with solid-state components that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation-resistance values of instrument transformers shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Test voltages shall be applied for one minute according to NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Insulation-resistance values of the transformers shall not be less than values shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

c. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H(1)-X(1) relationship. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.

d. Perform a turns-ratio test on all tap positions. Ratio errors shall not exceed the tolerances specified in IEEE C57.13.

e. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals. Measured burdens shall be compared to instrument transformer ratings. The measured burdens shall match the instrument transformer Accuracy Class rating.

f. Perform a dielectric-withstand-voltage test on the primary windings with the secondary windings connected to ground. The dielectric voltage shall comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.9. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric-withstand-voltage test, the primary windings are considered to have passed the test.

g. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests according to test equipment manufacturer's published data. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with test equipment manufacturer's published data.

h. Verify that voltage-transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only one grounding point according to IEEE C57.13.3.

Page 246: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 19

E. Microprocessor-Based Protective Relay Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Record model number, style number, serial number, firmware revision, software revision, and rated control voltage.

b. Verify operation of light-emitting diodes, display, and targets. c. Record passwords for each access level. d. Clean the front panel and remove foreign material from the case. e. Check tightness of connections. f. Verify that the frame is grounded according to manufacturer's instructions. g. Section 260574"Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study." h. Download settings from the relay. Print a copy of the settings for the report and

compare the settings to those specified in the coordination study.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests from each circuit to the grounded frame according to manufacturer's published data.

b. Apply voltage or current to analog inputs, and verify correct registration of the relay meter functions.

c. Functional Operation: Check functional operation of each element used in the protection scheme as follows:

1) Undervoltage Relay:

a) Determine dropout voltage. b) Determine time delay. c) Determine time delay at a second point on the timing curve for

inverse time relays.

2) Current Balance Relay:

a) Determine pickup of each unit. b) Determine percent slope. c) Determine time delay.

3) Negative Sequence Current Relay:

a) Determine negative sequence alarm level. b) Determine negative sequence minimum trip level. c) Determine maximum time delay. d) Verify two points on the I-two-squared-t curve.

4) Phase Sequence or Phase Balance Voltage Relay:

a) Determine positive sequence voltage to close the N.O. contact. b) Determine positive sequence voltage to open the N.C. contact

(undervoltage trip). c) Verify negative sequence trip.

Page 247: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 20

d) Determine time delay to close the N.O. contact with sudden application of 120 percent of pickup.

e) Determine time delay to close the N.C. contact upon removal of voltage when previously set to rated system voltage.

5) Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay:

a) Determine pickup. b) Determine dropout. c) Determine time delay.

6) Time Overcurrent:

a) Determine minimum pickup. b) Determine time delay at two points on the time current curve.

7) Overvoltage Relay:

a) Determine overvoltage pickup. b) Determine time delay to close the contact with sudden application of

120 percent of pickup.

8) Voltage Balance Relay:

a) Determine voltage difference to close the contacts with one source at rated voltage.

b) Plot the operating curve for the relay.

d. Control Verification:

1) Functional Tests:

a) Check operation of all active digital inputs. b) Check output contacts or SCRs, preferably by operating the

controlled device, such as circuit breaker, auxiliary relay, or alarm. c) Check internal logic functions used in protection scheme. d) For pilot schemes, perform a loop-back test to check receive and

transmit communication circuits. e) For pilot schemes, perform satellite synchronized end-to-end tests. f) For pilot schemes with direct transfer trip (DTT), perform transmit

and received DTT at each terminal. g) Upon completion of testing, reset min/max recorders,

communications statistics, fault counters, sequence-of-events recorder, and event records.

2) In-Service Monitoring: After the equipment is initially energized, measure magnitude and phase angle of inputs and verify expected values.

F. Large Dry-Type Transformer Section Field Tests:

Page 248: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 21

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been

removed. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Verify that alarm, control, and trip settings on temperature and level indicators are

set and operate within manufacturer's recommended settings. f. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by the

manufacturer. g. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. h. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-to-ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5. Calculate polarization index; the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0.

b. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests on windings according to the test equipment manufacturer's published data. Investigate and correct power-factor values that exceed:

1) 2.0 percent for power transformers. 2) 5.0 percent for distribution transformers.

c. Measure core insulation resistance at 500-V dc if the core is insulated and the core ground strap is removable. Core insulation-resistance values shall not be less than 1 megohm at 500-V dc.

d. Perform a power-factor or dissipation-factor tip-up test on windings greater than 2.5 kV. Tip-up test result exceeding 1.0 percent shall be investigated.

G. Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. c. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating the

breaker. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Verify that the arc chutes are intact. f. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition and alignment. g. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital to

satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct. h. Perform mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the breaker and

its operating mechanism according to manufacturer's published data. i. Verify cell fit and element alignment. j. Verify racking mechanism operation.

Page 249: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 22

k. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.

l. Perform adjustments for final protective-device settings according to coordination study provided by end user.

m. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Insulation-resistance values shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Values of insulation resistance less than this table or manufacturer's recommendations shall be investigated.

b. Measure contact resistance across each power contact of the circuit breaker. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data is not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

c. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. If manufacturer's curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed the value shown in NETA ATS, Table 100.7.

d. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band.

e. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. Ground-fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band.

f. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.8.

g. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. Pickup values and trip characteristic shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.

h. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils according to manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall conform to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.20.

i. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.

j. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features, such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free operation, anti-pump function, and trip unit battery condition. Reset trip logs and indicators. Auxiliary features shall operate according to manufacturer's published data.

Page 250: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 23

k. Verify operation of charging mechanism. The charging mechanism shall operate according to manufacturer's published data.

H. Metering Device Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk clearance,

contacts, and case shorting contacts, as applicable. c. Verify the unit is clean. d. Verify freedom of movement, end play, and alignment of rotating disk(s).

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Verify accuracy of meters at cardinal points. Meter accuracy shall be according to manufacturer's published data.

b. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's published data. Calibration results shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.

c. Verify instrument multipliers. Instrument multipliers shall be according to system design specifications.

d. Verify that current-transformer and voltage-transformer secondary circuits are intact. Test results shall confirm the integrity of the secondary circuits of current and voltage transformers.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain secondary unit substations

1. Train maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for energizing, tap changing,

troubleshooting, service and maintenance. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.” 3. Scheduling training wit Project Manager with at least 30 days advance notice.

END OF SECTION 261116.11

Page 251: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS WITH SWITCHGEAR SECONDARY 261116.11 - 24

THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 252: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

Page 253: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. General Electric Company. 6. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 7. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with DOE 2016 Efficiency energy levels.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated.

G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

Page 254: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: NSF/ANSI 49 gray.

E. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class, Smaller than 30 kVA: 185 deg. C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115-deg. C rise above 40-deg. C ambient temperature.

I. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg. C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg. C rise above 40-deg. C ambient temperature.

J. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

K. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

L. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, Minimum of 3dBA less than NEMA ST 20 Standard Sound levels.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

Page 255: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4

3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections. 4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage connections. 5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated voltage

connections. 6. Applied and induced tensile tests. 7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage. 8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground. b. Low-voltage to ground. c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall-mounted and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

B. Install transformers level and plumb.

C. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

Page 256: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 5

D. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

Page 257: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 6

END OF SECTION 262200

Page 258: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

E. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,

equipment features, and ratings. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

Page 259: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. 8. Shop drawings shall be approved only after approval of the protective device

coordination study is approved.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.

B. See "Testing and Inspecting" Article in the Evaluations for guidance on which option to select in paragraph below.

C. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

Page 260: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 90 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project Manager’s written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 5.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum. 3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

Page 261: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4

4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

F. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Top 2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.

G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating. 3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors. 4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard. 5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard. 6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

I. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

Page 262: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5

J. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 20percent.

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.

1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers or Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

Page 263: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

B. Coordinate "MCCB" and "Fused Switch" paragraphs below with Drawings. See the "Circuit Breakers" Article in the Evaluations for guidance on making selections.

C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

Page 264: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7

1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

5. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 6. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. e. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. f. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with

functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

g. Rating Plugs: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater than 150 amperes shall have interchangeable rating plugs or electronic adjustable trip units.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.

2. Obtain Approval before installing, using a computer or type writing. Hand written directories are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.

Page 265: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

F. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

G. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

H. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

I. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 1 1/4 inch in depth. Orient steel slotted supports vertically.

J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque

wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

Page 266: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9

L. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

M. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit breakers stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment:

Page 267: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 10

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 262416

Page 268: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 1

SECTION 262419 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less, with combination controllers and having the following factory-installed components:

1. Automatic power transfer. 2. Feeder-tap units. 3. Measurement and control. 4. Auxiliary devices. 5. Panelboards. 6. Transformers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCC: Motor-control center.

C. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

D. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. PID: Control action; proportional plus integral plus derivative.

G. PT: Potential transformer.

H. SPD: Surge protective device.

I. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

J. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.

K. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

Page 269: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 2

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for MCCs to include but not limited to the following:

a. Motor Starters b. Overload Relays c. Circuit Breaker, Motor Circuit Protector, and/or Fuse information including time

current characteristics d. Control Power Transformers e. Pilot Devices f. Relays g. Panelboards h. Transformers i. Metering j. Automatic Power Transfer k. Surge Protective Device

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories for each cell of the MCC.

B. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of complete MCC, and for bus structure

and each unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed controller

and feeder device, and installed devices. g. Specified optional features and accessories.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller.

3. Nameplate legends. 4. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. 6. Locations of shipping splits. 7. Manufacturer’s drawings shall be provided in PDF format.

Page 270: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 3

8. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for class and type of motor-control center. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of controller.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For MCCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

2. Manufacturer's Record Drawings: As defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include field modifications and field-assigned wiring identification incorporated during construction by manufacturer, Contractor, or both.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 5. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage, solid-state controllers. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. 7. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points. 8. Routine maintenance requirements for Motor Control Centers and all installed

components.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Power Fuses: Equal to 1 spare for every 6 installed, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

Page 271: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 4

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 1 spare for every 6 installed, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended use.

D. UL Compliance: MCCs shall comply with UL 845 and shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver MCCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery paths.

B. Handle MCCs according to the following:

1. NECA 402, "Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers."

2. NEMA ICS 2.3, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600 Volts."

C. Store motor-control centers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect motor-control centers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage

D. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover motor-control centers to protect from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace MCC that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

Page 272: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

2.2 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems. 3. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate and label MCCs to comply with NEMA ICS 18.

B. Ambient Environment Ratings:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg. F and not exceeding 104 deg. F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg. F over a 24-hour period.

2. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg. F and not exceeding 140 deg. F

3. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 1500 feet.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1A unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

2.5 ASSEMBLY

A. Structure: 1. Units up to and including Size 3 shall have drawout mountings with connectors that

disconnect (retract) from vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal positions.

Page 273: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 6

2. Automatic shutters to isolation the compartment from the vertical bus. 3. Units in Type B and Type C MCCs shall have pull-apart terminal strips for external

control connections.

B. Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners.

1. Interlock compartment door to require that the disconnecting means is "off" before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a concealed release device.

2. Compartment construction shall allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC.

3. The same-size compartments shall be interchangeable to allow rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.

C. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same-size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding.

D. Wiring Spaces:

1. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place.

2. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.

E. Provisions for Future:

1. Compartments marked "future" shall be bused, wired and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, and ready for insertion of drawout units.

2. Compartments marked "spare" shall include provisions for connection to the vertical bus.

F. Integrated Short-Circuit Rating:

1. Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 42 kA.

G. Control Power:

1. 120-V ac; obtained from CPT integral with controller; with primary and secondary fuses. The CPT shall be of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

Page 274: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 7

H. Factory-Installed Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Use flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

1. Wiring Class: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type C.

I. Bus:

1. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

2. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.

3. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity or tin-plated alloy, with mechanical connectors for outgoing conductors.

4. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure connector for ground conductors, minimum size 1/4-by-2 inches. Equip with mechanical connectors for outgoing conductors.

2.6 MAIN DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE(S)

A. MCCB (to 2500 A): Fixed mounted, manually operated air-circuit breaker. Comply with UL 489.

1. MCCB shall have quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free, its position shall be shown by the position of the handle, and manual push-to-trip push button.

2. Solid-state monitoring and tripping system to show system status monitoring, adjustable time-current protection, and shunt trip.

a. Interchangeable current sensors and timing circuits for adjustable time-current protection settings and status signals.

b. Trip-setting dials or interchangeable plugs to establish the continuous trip of the circuit breaker. Plugs shall not be interchangeable between frames, and the breaker may not be closed without the plug. With neutral ground-fault sensor.

c. Time-current adjustments to achieve protective-device coordination as follows:

1) Adjustable long-time delay. 2) Adjustable short-time setting and delay to shape the time-current curve. 3) Adjustable instantaneous setting. 4) Individually adjustable ground-fault setting and time delay.

d. Built-in connector to test the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground-fault functions of the breaker.

e. Built-in digital ammeter display, showing load current and tripping cause.

2.7 MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS

A. Controller Units: Combination controllers.

Page 275: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 8

B. Disconnects:

1. MCP:

a. UL 489, with interrupting capacity complying with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: For three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

C. Controllers: Comply with UL 508.

1. Full-Voltage Magnetic Controllers: Electrically held, full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

a. Classification: Non-reversing.

2. Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Electrically held, full voltage, NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

a. Classification: Reversing; two winding.

1) Two speeds, with compelling relay to ensure that motor will start only at low speed.

b. Timer Relays: Accelerating, for properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than that selected.

c. Timer Relays: Decelerating, for automatically timed deceleration through each speed.

d. Anti-plugging Relays: Time delay when transferring from FORWARD to REVERSE and back.

D. Overload Relays:

1. Solid-State Overload Relays:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. UL 1053 Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting.

2. N.O. isolated overload alarm contact. 3. External overload reset push button.

Page 276: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 9

2.8 REDUCED-VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE CONTROLLERS

A. Controller Units: An integrated unit with disconnects, power SCRs, heat sink, microprocessor logic board, door-mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and overload relays. Comply with UL 508.

1. Suitable for use with NEMA MG 1 Design B, polyphase induction motors.

B. Disconnects:

1. MCP:

a. UL 489, with interrupting capacity complying with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: For three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

C. Configuration: Severe duty; nonreversible.

D. Starting Mode: field selectable.

E. Stopping Mode: Coast to stop.

F. Bypass Contactor: Shall operate automatically to bypass the SCRs when the motor has reached rated speed and full voltage is applied to motor. Solid-state controller protective features shall remain active when the bypass relay is in the bypass mode.

1. .Bypass Contactor: NEMA ICS 2, general-purpose, Class A contactor, rated to start the load across the line.

2. Bypass Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type; manufacturer's standard operating voltage, matching control power or line voltage, depending on contactor size and line-voltage rating.

G. Acceleration Control: Adjustable, using voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting torque control with up to 400 percent current limitation for 20 seconds.

H. SCR Bridge: At least two SCRs per phase, for stable and smooth acceleration without external feedback from the motor or driven equipment.

I. Keypad: Front accessible; for programming the controller parameters, functions, and features; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following functions:

1. Adjusting motor full-load amperes, as a percentage of the controller's rating. 2. Adjusting current limitation on starting, as a percentage of the motor full-load current

rating. 3. Adjusting linear acceleration and deceleration ramps, in seconds. 4. Setting initial torque, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. 5. Adjusting torque limit, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. 6. Adjusting maximum start time, in seconds. 7. Adjusting voltage boost, as a percentage of the nominal supply voltage.

Page 277: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 10

8. Selecting stopping mode and adjusting parameters. 9. Selecting motor thermal-overload protection class between 5 and 30. 10. Activating and deactivating protection modes. 11. Selecting or activating communications modes.

J. Digital Display: Front accessible; for showing motor, controller, and fault status; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following:

1. Controller Condition: Ready, starting, running, stopping. 2. Motor Condition: Amperes, voltage, power factor, power, and thermal state. 3. Fault Conditions: Controller thermal fault, motor overload alarm and trip, motor

underload, overcurrent, shorted SCRs, line or phase loss, phase reversal, and line frequency over or under normal.

K. Controller Diagnostics and Protection:

1. Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring SCR and motor thermal characteristics, and providing controller over temperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

2. Protection from line-side reverse phasing; line-side and motor-side phase loss; motor jam, stall, and underload conditions; and line frequency excursions to over- or under-normal. Accomplish protection by the following:

a. Input isolation contactor that opens when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component, or when the motor is stopped.

b. Shunt trip that opens the disconnecting means when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component.

L. Remote Output Features:

1. All outputs prewired to terminal blocks. 2. Form C status contacts that change state when controller is running. 3. Form C alarm contacts that change state when a fault condition occurs.

M. Overload Relays:

1. Solid-State Overload Relays:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. UL 1053, Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting.

N. Optional Features:

1. Two additional field-assignable Form C contacts for alarm outputs.

Page 278: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 11

2. Full-voltage/BYPASS selector switch. Power contacts shall be totally enclosed, double break, made of silver-cadmium oxide, and assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

2.9 CONTROLLER-MOUNTED AUXILIARY DEVICES

A. Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: Factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy type.

a. Push Buttons: Recessed, Shielded, Shrouded types; momentary contact unless otherwise indicated.

b. Pilot Lights: LED; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Elapsed-Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; resettable.

C. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-deg.ree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy, with selector switches having an off position.

D. Auxiliary Dry Contacts: NC, NO Reversible NC/NO.

E. Control Relays:

1. Time Delay: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. 2. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Under voltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state

sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections and adjustable under voltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

2.10 MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL DEVICES

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound bushing, bar or

window type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. CPTs: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features installed for each MCC main:

1. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated

to 600 V. 3. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum

accuracy tolerances:

Page 279: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 12

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power (kilo watts): Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (kilo vars): Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, kilo watt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

5 to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

4. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.

5. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted, Integral, or Din-rail-mounted communication module(s) with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

C. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

2.11 FEEDER TAP UNITS

A. MCCBs (to 1200 A): Fixed mounted, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Comply with UL 489, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

1. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the

following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

2. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted, Universal-mounted, Integral, or Din-rail-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

3. With built-in digital ammeter and a digital display, showing tripping cause. 4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Under voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with time delay. 6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

Page 280: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 13

2.12 PANELBOARDS

A. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

B. Branch OCPDs: Bolt-on circuit breakers; or plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

C. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.

2.13 TRANSFORMERS

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled, two-winding, low-voltage dry-type transformers; with primary circuit breaker. Comply with NEMA ST 20.

B. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None.

C. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

D. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

E. Insulation Class: 220 deg. C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg. C rise above 40 deg. C ambient temperature.

F. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with DOE 2016 efficiency.

2.14 TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, open-transition transfer switches. The transfer switch shall comply with UL 1008.

B. Comply with NEMA ST 20.

C. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

Page 281: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 14

E. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg. C.

F. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41.1. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

G. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

H. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. MCC Testing: Test and inspect MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 18.

B. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive MCCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. NEMA Industrial Control and Systems Standards: Comply with parts of NEMA ICS 2.3 for installation and startup of MCCs.

B. Floor Mounting: Install MCCs on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete base unless noted otherwise. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

Page 282: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 15

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 12-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. 2. Install required warning signs. 3. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. 4. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 5. Mark up a set of manufacturer's connection wiring diagrams with field-assigned wiring

identifications and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MCCs.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between master terminal boards and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

Page 283: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 16

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

4. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multipole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Submit calibration record for device.

5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

6. Mark up a set of manufacturer's drawings with all field modifications incorporated during construction and return to manufacturer for inclusion in Record Drawings.

D. MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Page 284: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 17

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Verify that motor-control centers and components are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.

D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Project Manager before increasing settings.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

D. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.

END OF SECTION 262419

Page 285: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 262419 - 18

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 286: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V ac and less for use in the following:

a. Control circuits. b. Motor-control centers. c. Panelboards. d. Switchboards. e. Enclosed controllers. f. Enclosed switches.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Bussman, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, current-limiting, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

Page 287: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

FUSES 262813 - 2

1. Type RK-1: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 2. Type RK-5: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 3. Type CC: 600-V, zero- to 30-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 4. Type CD: 600-V, 31- to 60-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 5. Type J: 600-V, zero- to 600-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 6. Type L: 600-V, 601- to 6000-A rating, 200 kAIC, time delay. 7. Type T 600-V, zero- to 800-A rating, 200 kAIC, very fast acting, time delay.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information inside of door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

END OF SECTION 262813

Page 288: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-fusible switches. 2. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

Page 289: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

b. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Provide in PDF electronic format.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

Page 290: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.

C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be

Page 291: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4

over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.

D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated.

E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.

F. Lugs shall be suitable for 140 deg. F (60 deg. C) rated wire on 100A circuit breakers and below and 167 deg. F (75 deg. C) rated wire on Circuit Breakers over 100A.

G. Standards: Comply with UL 489 and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

I. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response.

K. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 7. Under voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.

Page 292: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5

8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

9. Alarm Switch: One NO, NC contacts that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 11. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 12. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be finished with gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1)

C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Type 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts.

D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be [externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than 90 days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

Page 293: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Project Manager’s written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

B. Tests and Inspections for Switches:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean.

Page 294: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 7

d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.

a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

f. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

g. Verify correct phase barrier installation. h. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding

surfaces.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.

d. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."

C. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

Page 295: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 8

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two

following methods:

1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.

a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.

a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.

g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units. h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the

coordination study.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.

c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less than two megohms.

e. Determine the following by primary current injection:

1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.

Page 296: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 9

2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.

3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors.

4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.

f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current injection. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.

g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall be as indicated by manufacturer.

h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators; zone interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-free, anti-pump function; and trip unit battery condition. Reset all trip logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not function as designed.

i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not function as designed.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test

results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

Page 297: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 10

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

END OF SECTION 262816

Page 298: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1

SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage magnetic. 2. Reduced-voltage solid state. 3. Multispeed.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 262923 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

Page 299: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

Page 300: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 3

2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 4. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than 90 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Project Manager’s written

permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

Page 301: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 4

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Non-reversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase.

Page 302: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 5

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting.

e. Analog communication module.

7. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button.

C. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA.

2.2 REDUCED-VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controllers: Comply with UL 508.

B. Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controllers: An integrated unit with power SCRs, heat sink, microprocessor logic board, door-mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and overload relay; suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, polyphase, medium induction motors. 1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

Page 303: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 6

c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Severe duty; nonreversible. 3. Starting Mode: field selectable. 4. Stopping Mode: Coast to stop. 5. Shorting (Bypass) Contactor: Operates automatically when full voltage is applied to

motor, and bypasses the SCRs. Solid-state controller protective features shall remain active when the shorting contactor is in the bypass mode.

6. Shorting and Input Isolation Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type; manufacturer's standard operating voltage, matching control power or line voltage, depending on contactor size and line-voltage rating. Provide coil transient suppressors.

7. Logic Board: Identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes, with environmental protective coating.

8. Control Circuits: 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

9. Adjustable acceleration-rate control using voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting torque control with up to 400 percent current limitation for 20 seconds.

10. SCR bridge shall consist of at least two SCRs per phase, providing stable and smooth acceleration without external feedback from the motor or driven equipment.

11. Keypad, front accessible; for programming the controller parameters, functions, and features; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following functions:

a. Adjusting motor full-load amperes, as a percentage of the controller's rating. b. Adjusting current limitation on starting, as a percentage of the motor full-load

current rating. c. Adjusting linear acceleration and deceleration ramps, in seconds. d. Initial torque, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. e. Adjusting torque limit, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. f. Adjusting maximum start time, in seconds. g. Adjusting voltage boost, as a percentage of the nominal supply voltage. h. Selecting stopping mode, and adjusting parameters. i. Selecting motor thermal overload protection class between 5 and 30. j. Activating and de-activating protection modes. k. Selecting or activating communication modes.

12. Digital display, front accessible; for showing motor, controller, and fault status; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following:

a. Controller Condition: Ready, starting, running, stopping. b. Motor Condition: Amperes, voltage, power factor, power, and thermal state. c. Fault Conditions: Controller thermal fault, motor overload alarm and trip, motor

underload, overcurrent, shorted SCRs, line or phase loss, phase reversal, and line frequency over or under normal.

Page 304: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 7

13. Controller Diagnostics and Protection:

a. Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring SCR and motor thermal characteristics, and providing controller over temperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad.

b. Protection from line-side reverse phasing; line-side and motor-side phase loss; motor jam, stall, and underload conditions; and line frequency over or under normal.

c. Input isolation contactor that opens when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component or when the motor is stopped.

d. Shunt trip that opens the disconnecting means when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component.

14. Remote Output Features:

a. All outputs prewired to terminal blocks. b. Form C status contacts that change state when controller is running. c. Form C alarm contacts that change state when a fault condition occurs.

15. Optional Features:

a. Analog output for field-selectable assignment of motor operating characteristics; 4 to 20-mA dc.

b. Additional field-assignable Form C contacts, as indicated, for alarm outputs. c. Surge suppressors in solid-state power circuits providing three-phase protection

against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

d. Full-voltage bypass contactor operating automatically and manually, with NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. Power contacts shall be totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; and assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

e. Solid-State Overload Relay:

1) Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. 2) Sensors in each phase. 3) Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor

against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. 4) Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting. 5) Analog communication module.

f. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. g. External overload reset push button.

C. Combination Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controller: Factory-assembled combination of reduced-voltage solid-state controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following;

Page 305: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 8

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

2. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA.

2.3 MULTISPEED MAGNETIC CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Multispeed Magnetic Controllers: Two speed, full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

2. Configuration: Reversing; winding. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120 V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

Page 306: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 9

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Compelling relays shall ensure that motor will start only at low speed. 7. Accelerating timer relays shall ensure properly timed acceleration through speeds lower

than that selected. 8. Decelerating timer relays shall ensure automatically timed deceleration through each

speed. 9. Anti-plugging timer relays shall ensure a time delay when transferring from FORWARD

to REVERSE and back.

10. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting. e. Analog communication module.

11. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 12. External overload reset push button.

C. Combination Multispeed Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of reduced-voltage magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 4. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

D MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA.

Page 307: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 10

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered Lockable Recessed Shielded Shrouded Unguarded types; maintained momentary as indicated.

b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary.

2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours resettable.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Under voltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable under voltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

D. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

E. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Page 308: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 11

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

Page 309: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 12

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Project Manager before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports:

Page 310: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 13

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Project Manager before increasing settings.

D. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 PROTECTION`

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

Page 311: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 14

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.

END OF SECTION 262913

Page 312: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 1

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFD’s for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for monitoring and control of motor circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.

C. LAN: Local area network.

D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

F. VFD: Variable frequency drive.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of VFD, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; location for conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFD.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

Page 313: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 2

b. Nameplate legends. c. Short-circuit current ratings of integrated unit. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-control center

unit.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFD. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of VFD.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFD’s where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show VFD layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency and manufacturer.

E. Field Test Reports: Written reports specified in Part 3.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFD’s, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFD’s and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 160 km (100 miles) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Project Manager, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFD’s of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Project Manager, and marked for intended use.

E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFD’s, minimum clearances between VFD’s, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated dimensions and clearances.

Page 314: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 3

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store VFD’s indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect VFD’s from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFD’s to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFD’s with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section “Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.”

C. Coordinate features of VFD’s, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.

D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFD and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFD; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of a NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase, premium-efficiency induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Variable frequency drive shall be Yaskawa Model E7 with internal bypass and compatible with Apogee control software. VFD and bypass shall be as manufactured by Yaskawa. No third party control or bypass shall be incorporated into or provided with the E7 controller.

B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range.

D. Unit Operating Requirements:

Page 315: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 4

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent. 3. Capable of driving full load, under the following conditions, without derating:

a. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg. C. b. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (non-condensing). c. Altitude: 1000 m (3300 feet).

4. Minimum Efficiency: 98 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent. 6. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base

load current for 3 seconds. 7. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 9. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed

range.

E. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

F. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 2. Snubber networks to protect against malfunction due to system voltage transients. 3. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter over temperature, overload, and overcurrent trips. 4. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA 250, Class 20 performance. 5. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural

frequency of the combination. 6. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 7. Loss-of-phase protection. 8. Reverse-phase protection. 9. Short-circuit protection. 10. Motor over temperature fault.

G. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped.

H. Torque Boost: Automatically vary starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to insure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

I. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fallback based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

J. Status Lights: 22mm Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

Page 316: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 5

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

K. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: 22mm Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

L. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (VDC). 9. Set-point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V).

M. Control Signal Interface: Signal interface shall be compatible with Apogee. Provide VFD with the following:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BMS or other control systems:

a. 0 to 10-V dc. b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. e. RS485. f. Keypad display for local hand operation.

3. Output Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:

1) Output frequency (Hz). 2) Output current (load). 3) DC-link voltage (VDC). 4) Motor torque (percent). 5) Motor speed (rpm).

Page 317: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 6

6) Set-point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set-point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (over temperature or overcurrent). d. PID high or low speed limits reached.

N. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFD to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFD to be programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFD to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory. Communication with Apogee is required. For required interface, see Input/ Output Summary Sheets on Drawings.

O. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate VFD and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

P. Nameplate: Engraved.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 1

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

C. Standard Displays:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Set-point frequency (Hz). 3. Motor current (amperes). 4. DC-link voltage (VDC). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Motor speed (rpm). 7. Motor output voltage (V).

D. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time.

Page 318: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 7

3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

E. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controller: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable response delay.

F. Breakout Cable: Breaking out cable with customer accessible terminals for AUTO, HAND, DRIVE, and BYPASS Mode Indication.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFD’s before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFD’s for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFD installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each VFD to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, drive, and load.

B. Select rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each VFD assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with VFD mounting surface.

B. Install VFD’s on concrete bases complying with Division 3 Section "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

Page 319: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 8

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFD’s, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFD’s, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFD units.

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFD’s and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where available.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16. Certify compliance with test parameters.

Page 320: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 9

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and adjusting VFD’s.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

3.8 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean VFD’s internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain VFD’s.

END OF SECTION 262923

Page 321: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923 - 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Page 322: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 1

SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.

Page 323: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 2

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with UL 1449.

D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

E. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories: a. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components. b. Indicator light display for protection status. c. Surge counter.

F. Comply with UL 1283.

G. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 240kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

H. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

Page 324: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 3

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

I. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA.

J. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.2 MCC SUPPRESSORS

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.

1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor

components.

B. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 140 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

C. Comply with UL 1283.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA

F. Inominal Rating: kA.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

Page 325: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

Page 326: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 5

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.

END OF SECTION 264313

Page 327: Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM · Motor Control Center Replacement-Design (Phase II) AECOM Project 3015 November 10, 2016 ... statement of U.S. citizenship

Motor Control Center Replacement AECOM Ft. Belvoir, VA November 10, 2016 IFC Submission

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 6

THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK